User Guide
HTC Touch Pro2
www.sprint.com
© 2009 Sprint. Sprint and the logo are trademarks of Sprint.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the headings listed here, try the Index on page 221.
Tip
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Section 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1A. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setting Up Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Activating Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sprint Account Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Section 2: Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2A. Device Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inside the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Using Your Device’s Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Navigating on Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Zoom Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
The Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using the Getting Started Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting Your Device to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2B. Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Sliding QWERTY Keyboard vs. Onscreen Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Sliding QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using the Full QWERTY Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the Phone Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using Predictive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using Numeric and Symbol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2C. TouchFLO 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
The TouchFLO 3D Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Photos and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Sprint Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sprint TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2D. Using Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Making Calls from the Phone Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Making Calls from the TouchFLO 3D Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Answering and Ending Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
In-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Checking Missed Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Straight Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Turning the Phone On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Phone Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
About Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Ways to Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting Up Windows Mobile Device Center on Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting Up ActiveSync on Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Synchronizing With Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Synchronizing via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Synchronizing Music and Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Comm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adobe Reader LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Microsoft Office Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
WorldCard Mobile (Business Card Scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
JETCET PRINT (Wireless Printing Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2G. microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Using a microSD Card on Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Managing the microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using Your Device as a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2H. Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2I. Experiencing Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Taking Photos and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Viewing Photos and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Using Windows Media Player Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Using Audio Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using MP3 Trimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2J. Managing Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Copying and Managing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Settings on Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Connecting to an External Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Protecting Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Managing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Adding and Removing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Resetting Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Windows Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Section 3: Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Text Messaging (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Video and Picture Messaging (MMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Using Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3B. Web and Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Ways of Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Getting Started With Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using Windows Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Google Mobile App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Using RSS Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Accessing Sprint Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Email Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Working With Company Email and Meeting Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Using Your Device As a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3C. Entertainment: TV and Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Music — Sprint Music Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Streaming Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
NFL Mobile Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3D. GPS Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Guidelines and Preparation for Using GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Downloading Satellite Data via QuickGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Windows Live Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Your SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Using Your Device in GSM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using Your SIM Card’s PhoneBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting GSM Services Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Contacting Sprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4A. Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Important Health Information and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Additional Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4B. Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Regulatory Agency Identifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
SAR Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Body-worn Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Telecommunications & Internet Association (TIA) Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
WEEE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
RoHS Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4C. Warranty, Disclaimers and Other Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Privacy Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Weather Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Warranty Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Limitation of Damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Introduction
This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and all the features of your new device. It’s divided into
four sections:
ࡗ Section 1: Getting Started ࡗ Section 2: Your Device ࡗ Section 3: Sprint Service ࡗ Section 4: Safety Information and Other Notices Throughout this guide, you’ll find tips that highlight special shortcuts and timely reminders to help you make
the most of your new device and service. The Table of Contents and Index will also help you quickly locate
specific information.
You’ll get the most out of your device if you read each section. However, if you’d like to get right to a specific
feature, simply locate that section in the Table of Contents and go directly to that page. Follow the
instructions in that section, and you’ll be ready to use your device in no time.
Because of updates in the device’s software, this user guide may not be the most current version for your
device. Visit www.sprint.com and log on to My Sprint Wireless to access the most recent version of the
user guide.
User Guide
Note
Please refer to Important Safety Information on page 202 to learn about information that will help you
safely use your device. Failure to read and follow the Important Safety Information in this user guide may
result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
WARNING
i
Section 1A
Setting Up Service
Setting up and activating your new device is quick and easy. This section walks you through the necessary steps to
set up your device, activate your device’s phone, set up your voicemail, establish passwords, and contact
Sprint for assistance with your Sprint service.
Setting Up Your Device
You can also insert a microSD™ card into your device. To learn how to insert a microSD card, see “Using a
Note
Installing the Battery
1. Remove the back cover by following these steps:
Ⅲ Remove the stylus. (You need to temporarily remove the stylus to be able to remove the back cover.)
Ⅲ Hold the device with both hands and the front panel facing down.
Ⅲ Push the back cover up with your thumb until it disengages from the device and then slide it up to
remove.
2
Section 1A. Setting Up Service
2. Install the battery by following these steps:
Ⅲ Align the battery’s exposed copper contacts with the battery connectors inside the battery
compartment.
Ⅲ Insert the contact’s side of the battery first and then gently push the battery into place.
3. Replace the back cover, and insert the stylus back into the stylus compartment.
Turning the Device On for the First Time
1. Press the Power button.
2. When you turn on your device for the first time, your device starts up and guides you to calibrate the
touch screen. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the screen calibration process.
3. Your device will then be activated.
Ⅲ If your device’s phone is already activated, it will search for Sprint service and then enter standby mode.
Ⅲ If your device’s phone is not yet activated, see “Activating Your Device” on page 3 for more information.
Your device’s battery should have enough charge for your device to turn on and find a signal, set up your
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge your battery as soon as possible. See “Charging the Battery”
on page 13 for details.
Note
Activating Your Device
ⅷ If you purchased your device at a Sprint Store, it is probably activated and ready to use.
ⅷ If you received your device in the mail and it is for a new Sprint account or a new line of service, it is designed to
activate automatically. To confirm your activation, make a phone call.
ⅷ If you received your device in the mail and you are activating a new device for an existing number on your account, you
will need to go online to activate your new device.
instructions to activate your new device.
When you have finished, make a phone call to confirm your activation. If your device is still not activated or
you do not have access to the Internet, contact Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727 for assistance.
• Do not press the End key while your device is being activated. Pressing the End key cancels the activation
process.
Notes
• If you are having difficulty with activation, contact Sprint Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727 from
any other phone.
Section 1A. Setting Up Service
3
Making Your First Call
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
Talk Key
2. Tap the keys on the Phone keypad to enter the phone number.
3. Tap
to place the call.
For more information about using your device to make and receive phone calls, see “Using Phone Features”
Setting Up Your Voicemail
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Tap and hold
on the Phone keypad.
3. Follow the system prompts to:
Ⅲ Create your passcode.
Ⅲ Record your greeting.
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.
Voicemail Passcode
Note
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a passcode when setting up your voicemail to protect against
unauthorized access. Without a passcode, anyone who has access to your device is able to access your
voicemail messages.
For more information about using your voicemail, see “Voicemail” on page 128.
Sprint Account Passwords
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal account information, your voicemail
account, and your data services account. To ensure that no one else has access to your information, you will
need to create passwords to protect your privacy.
Account User Name and Password
If you are the account owner, you will create an account user name and password when you sign on to
www.sprint.com. (Click Need to register for access? to get started.) If you are not the account owner (if someone
else receives the bill for your Sprint service), you can get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.
Voicemail Password
You will create your voicemail password (or passcode) when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up
4
Section 1A. Setting Up Service
Data Services Password
With your Sprint device, you may elect to set up an optional data services password to control data (Web)
access and authorize Premium Service purchases.
For more information or to change your passwords, sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer
Service at 1-888-211-4727.
Getting Help
Managing Your Account
Online: www.sprint.com
You can go online to:
ⅷ Access your account information.
ⅷ Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint service plan).
ⅷ View and pay your bill.
ⅷ Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.
ⅷ Purchase accessories.
ⅷ Shop for the latest Sprint devices.
ⅷ View available Sprint service plans and options.
ⅷ Enable international wireless voice and data services.
ⅷ Learn more about data services and other great products like Sprint Picture Mail, games, ringers, screen
savers, and more.
From Your Sprint Phone
ⅷ From the Phone screen, tap
to check minute usage and account balance.
to make a payment.
ⅷ From the Phone screen, tap
ⅷ From the Phone screen, tap
get answers to other questions.
to access a summary of your Sprint service plan or
From Any Other Phone
ⅷ Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.
ⅷ Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.
ⅷ Sprint Worldwide Service: 1-888-226-7212 (option 2).
Sprint 411
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and information, including residential, business, and
government listings; movie listings or showtimes; driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major local
event information. You can get up to three pieces of information per call, and the operator can automatically
connect your call at no additional charge.
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you will be billed for airtime.
ᮣ From the Phone screen, tap
.
Section 1A. Setting Up Service
5
Sprint Operator Services
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you place collect calls or when you place calls billed to
a local telephone calling card or third party.
ᮣ From the Phone screen, tap
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services, visit us online at www.sprint.com.
6
Section 1A. Setting Up Service
Section 2A
Device Basics
Before you start using your device, take some time to familiarize yourself first with what is available on your device. This
section will introduce about the device controls and the home screen on your device. Basic functions such
as turning your device on and off and adjusting sound volume will also be covered in this section.
Device Software Upgrades – Updates to your device’s software may become available from time to time. Sprint
will automatically upload critical updates to your device. You can also open the Settings screen to check for and
download updates. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings. On the System tab, tap Update Firmware to search for
and download available updates.
Tip
8
Section 2A. Device Basics
Your Device
Top and Front Panels
1
11
10
9
8
2
7
3 4
5 6
1. Power Button. Press to turn off the display temporarily. To turn off the power, press and hold for about five
2. Sliding QWERTY Keyboard. Slide out the QWERTY keyboard and use it to type messages or documents.
3. Talk Key. Press to answer an incoming call or display the Phone screen to place a call. During a call, press
and hold to toggle the speakerphone on and off. While viewing a text or email message, press to display
the Phone screen so you can call the sender of the message. (See “Using Phone Features” on page 57
for details.)
5. Back Key. Press to return to the previous screen.
6. End Key. Press to end a call or return to the TouchFLO 3D Home tab. By default, pressing and holding this
key turns Airplane mode on or off. You can reassign pressing and holding of the End key to another
7. Zoom Bar. Slide your finger from left to right to zoom in, or from right to left to zoom out.
(See “Using the Zoom Bar” on page 16 for details.)
8. Touch Screen. Use finger gestures or the stylus to navigate and interact with the screen. (See “Navigating
on Your Device” on page 14 for details.)
Section 2A. Device Basics
9
9. Notification LED. This LED shows the following:
Ⅲ Flashing green light when there are new text, picture, video, or email messages, missed calls, or
reminders.
Ⅲ Solid green light when the device is connected to the power adapter or a computer and the battery is
fully charged.
Ⅲ Solid amber light when the battery is being charged.
Ⅲ Flashing amber light when the remaining battery level reaches below 10%.
10. Light Sensor. This senses the ambient light and adjusts the screen backlight accordingly.
11. Earpiece. Listen to a phone call from here.
Left, Right, and Bottom Panels
12
18
13
17
14
15 16
12. Volume Up Button. During a call or when playing music, press this button to increase the volume.
13. Volume Down Button. During a call or when playing music, press this button to lower the volume.
14. Primary Microphone. Speak into this microphone during phone conversations, when recording a voice
note, or when giving a voice command.
15. Sync Connector. Connect one of the following:
Ⅲ Connect the AC phone charger to recharge the battery.
Ⅲ Connect the supplied USB cable to a computer so you can synchronize information.
Ⅲ Connect a USB stereo headset (purchased separately) for hands-free conversation or for listening to
audio media.
Ⅲ Connect a composite video and audio cable (purchased separately) to output the device screen
contents and device audio to an external viewing device.
10
Section 2A. Device Basics
16. Audio Connector. Connect any standard 3.5mm audio headset.
17. Stylus. Use the stylus to write, draw, or select items on the screen. (See “Stylus” on page 16 for details.)
18. Secondary Microphone. Both the primary and secondary microphones are enabled when the
Back Panel
19
20
23
21
22
19. 3.2 Megapixel Camera. Use the camera to take photos and capture video clips. (See “Taking Photos and
Videos” on page 98 for details.)
20.Mute Button. Press to mute or unmute the dual microphone.
21. Back Cover. Push the back cover upward to remove it.
22. Strap Holder. Connect a strap or lanyard to easily carry your device.
23. Dual Speaker. Use this noise-cancelling dual speaker for three-way calls.
Inside the Box
The product package includes the following items and accessories:
ⅷ HTC Touch Pro2
ⅷ AC phone charger
ⅷ USB sync cable
ⅷ Battery
ⅷ Extra stylus
ⅷ LCD screen protector
ⅷ Getting Started CD
ⅷ Get Started Poster, Basics Guide, Set Up Your Email Guide, and Features Guide
Section 2A. Device Basics
11
Turning Your Device On and Off
Turning the Power On
ᮣ Press the Power button located at the top of your device.
Turning the Power Off
1. Press and hold the Power button for about five seconds.
2. Tap Yes when a message prompts you to choose whether to turn off the power.
Switching to Sleep Mode When Not In Use
Press and immediately release the Power button to turn off the display temporarily and switch your device to
Sleep mode. Sleep mode suspends your device to a low power state while the display is off in order to save
battery power.
Your device automatically goes into sleep mode when you leave the device idle after a certain period of
time. You will still be able to receive messages and calls while your device is in sleep mode. Pulling the
stylus out of its compartment, pressing the Power button again, or incoming calls or messages will wake up
your device.
Using Your Device’s Battery and Charger
Your device is equipped with a Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is
fully drained. The battery provides up to nnn hours of continuous digital talk time.
• Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce the
battery’s talk and standby times.
Note
• Watch your device’s battery level indicator and charge the battery before it runs out of power.
If you need to purchase extra batteries for your device, Sprint-approved or HTC-approved batteries and
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through HTC; or call 1-866-343-1114 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com.
Use only Sprint-approved or HTC-approved batteries and chargers with your device. The failure to use a
Sprint-approved or HTC-approved battery and charger may increase the risk that your device will overheat,
catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
WARNING
To reduce risk of fire or burns:
• Do not attempt to open, disassemble, or service the battery pack.
• Do not crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.
• Do not expose to temperatures above 140oF (60oC).
• Replace only with the battery pack designated for this product.
• Recycle or dispose of used battery as stipulated by local regulations.
12
Section 2A. Device Basics
Installing and Removing the Battery
Always turn off your device before installing or replacing the battery. You also need to remove the back cover
before you can install these components.
To install the battery:
To remove the battery:
1. Make sure your device is turned off.
2. Remove the stylus, and then remove the back cover.
3. Lift out the battery from the groove at the upper right side of the battery compartment.
Groove
4. Replace the back cover and insert the stylus back into the stylus compartment.
Charging the Battery
Charge your battery as soon as possible so you can begin using your device.
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery level becomes too low, your device
automatically turns off, and you will lose any information you were just working on. For a quick check of your
battery level, glance at the battery charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your device’s display
screen. If the battery charge is critically low, the battery icon (
) will be shown in the title bar.
Always use a Sprint-approved or HTC-approved desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power adapter to
charge your battery.
To charge the battery:
1. Connect the USB connector of the phone charger to the sync connector on your device.
2. Plug in the phone charger to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.
Charging is indicated by an amber light shown on the notification LED of your device. As the battery is being
charged while the power is on, a charging icon (
the battery has been fully charged, the notification LED shows a green light, and a full battery icon
) appears in the title bar of the Home screen.
) also appears in the title bar of the Home screen. After
(
For more information about the notification LED, see “Top and Front Panels” on page 9.
• Do not remove the battery while you are charging it using the phone charger or car adapter.
• As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.
WARNING
Section 2A. Device Basics
13
Battery Saving Tips
How long your battery power lasts depends on the battery type and how you use your device. Try the
following to help conserve battery life:
ⅷ When the device is not in use, press the Power button to switch off the display.
ⅷ Tap Start > Settings > All Settings. On the System tab, tap Power > Advanced tab of the Power settings screen.
Here, you can specify the time before your device automatically turns off the display and backlight to
conserve battery power. For optimum conservation, specify three minutes or less.
ⅷ Tap Start > Settings > All Settings. On the System tab, tap Power > Backlight tab, clear the Auto adjust backlight
check box, and manually adjust the backlight brightness settings.
ⅷ Use the AC phone charger to plug your device into an external power outlet whenever possible, especially
when using a modem or other peripherals.
ⅷ Turn Bluetooth off when you are not using it. Make your device visible to other devices only when you are
trying to establish a Bluetooth partnership. For more information about Bluetooth, see “Using Bluetooth”
ⅷ Turn Wi-Fi off when you are not using it.
ⅷ Lower the volume.
ⅷ Close battery-intensive programs such as the camera when you are done using them. Make sure the
programs are ended and are not continuously running in the background. See “Using Task Manager” on
Navigating on Your Device
You can use finger gestures or the stylus to navigate and interact with the interface of your device:
Finger gestures
You can use finger gestures to select, scroll and pan on the touch screen.
Touching or tapping
When selecting items on the screen, such as the Home screen tabs, Start screen, programs and settings
icons, and large onscreen buttons, simply touch them with your finger. Apply some pressure with your finger
pad when touching an item on the screen.
“Tapping” is touching the screen lightly and quickly with your finger pad or fingertip. On screens that display
smaller-size items, you can more accurately select an item by tapping it with your fingertip.
Finger-scrolling
Finger-scrolling can be used to scroll up and down Web pages, documents, and lists such as the contacts
list, file list, message list, calendar appointments list, and more.
To scroll up and down:
ⅷ To scroll down, swipe your finger upward on the touch screen. To scroll up, swipe your finger downward
on the touch screen. (“Swiping” means dragging your finger vertically on the screen.)
ⅷ To auto-scroll, flick your finger upward or downward on the touch screen. Touch the screen to stop
scrolling. (“Flicking” is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipe your finger in light, quicker
strokes.)
14
Section 2A. Device Basics
To scroll left and right:
ⅷ To scroll towards the right, swipe your finger to the left. To scroll towards the left, swipe your finger to the
right.
ⅷ To auto-scroll, flick your finger left or right. Touch the screen to stop scrolling.
When finger-scrolling, swipe or flick your finger on the touch screen.
Finger-zooming
To zoom in on a Web page in Opera Mobile or a photo in Album, tap your finger twice on the screen. To
zoom out, tap twice again on the screen.
information about using Album, see “Viewing Photos and Videos” on page 105.
Finger-panning
You can use finger-panning to move to and view other parts of a zoomed photo, Web page, document, or an
email message. To pan, touch and hold on the touch screen and then drag your finger in any direction.
Section 2A. Device Basics
15
Stylus
To use the stylus, pull it out from the stylus compartment at the bottom right of your device. If the backlight is
off, removing the stylus automatically turns the backlight back on.
Tap with the stylus to open programs and select items on the screen, and tap and hold on the screen to
open a shortcut menu. You can also use the stylus in a similar way to making finger gestures.
Using the Zoom Bar
The zoom bar located below the touch screen is a handy zoom control that is unique on your device. When
you are viewing a Web page in Opera Mobile or a photo in Album, you can zoom in by sliding your finger
from left to right across the Zoom bar, or zoom out by sliding from right to left.
You can also instantly enlarge or shrink the text size when you are reading messages or Word documents.
Slide your finger from left to right across the zoom bar to increase the text size, or slide from right to left to
decrease. To increase or decrease the text size more, slide across the zoom bar again.
Zoom Bar
16
Section 2A. Device Basics
The Home Screen
The default screen of your device is the TouchFLO™ 3D Home screen which allows finger-touch access to
the most important functions such as contacts, text messages, email, calendar, Internet, and more.
6
5
1
2
3
4
1. Open the Start screen for quick access to important features and programs on your device. You can
details.
4. Open the All Contacts screen to view, add or edit contact information See “People” on page 37 for
details.
6. Check the status icons for battery usage, connection status, and more. See “Status Icons” on page 19
for details.
Section 2A. Device Basics
17
Start Screen
The Start screen, which can be opened by touching Start on the top-left corner of the screen or by pressing
the Start key (
), gives you one-touch access to all the programs and settings of your Windows Mobile-
powered device. You can also add your favorite programs to the Start screen so you can open them quickly.
1
2
3
4
5
1. Open or close the Start screen.
2. Open a program on the Start screen by tapping the corresponding icon.
3. Scroll down the Start screen, and then touch an empty slot to add a program.
4. View the complete list of programs that are available on your device.
5. Choose icons to remove from the Start screen. The Home, People, Calendar, and Settings icons are
permanent icons and cannot be removed or replaced with other program icons.
To replace a slot with another program, you must delete the current program shortcut first and then add the new
program.
Note
18
Section 2A. Device Basics
Status Icons
The following are some of the status icons that you may see on the device.
1 2 3 4 5
Multiple notifications; tap the icon to view all
1
New email messages
New SMS text messages
New voicemail notification
New instant message from Live Messenger
Missed call
Speakerphone on
Roaming
Alarm
Other wireless network(s) detected
Wired headset connected
Bluetooth on
Bluetooth visible mode on
Bluetooth stereo headset connected
1xRTT available
2
EVDO available
Connected to a wireless network
Connection is active
Connection is not active
Synchronization in progress
Section 2A. Device Basics
19
Data connection is active but idle
3
Data connection is active and
transmitting data
Maximum signal strength
No signal
Phone is turned off
No phone service
Searching for phone service
Voice call in progress
Vibrate mode
Battery charging
4
5
Sound on
Sound off
Battery fully charged
Battery charge level very low
Notifications Screen
When you touch or tap any of the status icon area of the title bar, the Notifications screen opens to display
your connection status and lists all your pending notifications including missed calls, new text messages,
new email, event reminders, and more.
1
2
3
1. Tap an item on the Notifications screen to open the related screen.
2. Tap Dismiss All to ignore all notifications.
3. To close the Notifications screen, tap Close or press the Back key.
20
Section 2A. Device Basics
Quick Menu
The Quick menu, which can be opened from the top right corner of the screen, shows the currently running
programs. You can quickly switch between running programs, stop programs, and see how much program
memory is being used.
5 4
3
2
1
1. Allows you to switch to a running program by touching the program name.
Allows you to stop a running program by touching
.
2. Opens the Quick Menu.
3. Shows the total percentage of program memory in use. Touch to open the Memory settings screen.
5. Stops all currently running programs.
Adjusting the Volume
By default, your device allows you to set a single volume level for both the system volume (notifications and
audio/video playback volume) and the phone ring volume. If you want to adjust the system volume and ring
volume separately, first you will need to disable the Single Volume option in the settings.
To set a single volume:
1. Open the Volume screen by pressing either the Volume Up or Volume Down button on your device.
2. To increase or decrease the volume level, drag your finger up or down the volume bars, or press the
Volume Up or Volume Down button. You can also:
Ⅲ Touch Silent to mute the volume.
Ⅲ Touch Vibrate to switch the device to Vibrate mode.
3. The Volume screen automatically closes. You can also tap an empty area of the Volume screen to
close it.
You can also press the Volume Up or Volume Down button to adjust the earpiece volume during an ongoing call.
Note
Section 2A. Device Basics
21
To adjust the system and ring volumes separately:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Sound.
2. Turn off the Single Volume option.
3. Press the Volume Up or Volume Down button on your device.
4. To switch between the System Volume and Ring Volume screens, touch System or Ring at the top of the
screen.
5. To adjust the volume level on either screen, drag your finger up or down the volume bars, or press the
Volume Up or Volume Down button on your device. You can also set to Silent or Vibrate mode.
Volume
bars
Also press the Volume Up or Volume Down button when adjusting the conversation phone volume during an
ongoing call.
Tip
22
Section 2A. Device Basics
Using the Getting Started Application
The Getting Started application is a list of “how to’s” that you can use to learn basic features and settings of
your device.
To learn the basics through the Getting Started application:
1. Tap Start > Getting Started. (You may need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
2. In the Getting Started application, tap one of the items onscreen to learn how to do a certain task.
3. If there is a link to the screen where you actually perform a selected task, tap the link to go to that screen.
Connecting Your Device to a Computer
Whenever you connect your device to the computer with the USB cable, the Connect to PC screen displays
and prompts you to choose the type of USB connection:
ActiveSync
Select this mode when you need to do the following:
ⅷ Synchronize Outlook email messages, contacts, calendar appointments, files, and other data between
your device and your computer.
ⅷ Have read and write access to the whole device.
Disk Drive
This mode is available for selection only when you installed a microSD card on your device. Select this
mode when you want to use your storage card as a USB thumb drive, and copy files between your device’s
storage card and your computer faster.
Internet Sharing
When you do not have Internet access on your computer, you can select this mode to use your device as a
modem for your computer.
For more information about using Internet Sharing, see “Using Your Device As a Modem” on page 167.
Section 2A. Device Basics
23
Section 2B
Entering Text
Your device provides convenient ways to enter letters, numbers, and symbols whenever you are prompted to enter text (for
example, when adding a Contacts entry or when using email and SMS text messaging). This section shows
you how to enter text using the sliding QWERTY keyboard and various onscreen input methods that are
available on your device.
The Sliding QWERTY Keyboard vs. Onscreen Keyboards
You can use either the sliding QWERTY keyboard or one of the onscreen keyboards to enter text.
Sliding QWERTY Keyboard
Your device comes with a sliding QWERTY keyboard, which is similar to a standard keyboard on your
computer.
To use the keyboard, slide the screen panel to the right to reveal the keyboard. The screen orientation
automatically switches to landscape mode when the keyboard is opened.
For more information about using the QWERTY keyboard, see “Using the Sliding QWERTY Keyboard” on
24
Section 2B. Entering Text
Onscreen Keyboards
For single-handed text input in portrait mode, you can use one of the finger-friendly onscreen keyboards:
Full QWERTY and Phone Keypad.
3
1
2
1. When you use a program or select a field that allows you to enter text or numbers, the Input Panel icon
becomes available at the bottom center of the screen.
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow (that appears next to the Input Panel icon) to open the Input Method menu
where you can select an onscreen keyboard to use for entering text.
Input Method menu
3. After selecting a type of onscreen keyboard, the selected keyboard layout is displayed on the screen for
you to use.
When in landscape mode, Phone keypad is not available.
Note
Other Input Methods
In the Input Method menu, you can also choose from other available input methods by tapping Other Input
Methods. For more information about using these input methods, see Help on your device.
Section 2B. Entering Text
25
Using the Sliding QWERTY Keyboard
After opening the sliding QWERTY keyboard, you can adjust the angle of the device screen to minimize
glare and reflection.
Adjusting the LCD Screen Angle
The maximum tilting angle of the screen is 50 degrees. Do not force the screen to tilt further than the
maximum tilting angle as it will break the device.
50°
angle
Before you retract the screen, please be sure to adjust the screen angle back to the original horizontal
position.
Keys on the Sliding QWERTY Keyboard
ⅷ To type lowercase letters and numbers, press the keys using your thumbs or fingers.
ⅷ To enter all uppercase letters, press
twice, or press
first and then press
.
To change back to all lowercase letters, press
again.
and then press the corresponding key.
ⅷ To enter a single uppercase letter, press
26
Section 2B. Entering Text
ⅷ To enter a symbol or punctuation mark, or launch the program that is printed on the upper right corner of
a key, press and then press the corresponding key.
ⅷ To open the Symbol Pad, press and then press
to insert a hard return while typing.
.
ⅷ Press
ⅷ Press the arrow keys
/
/
/
for directional movement.
ⅷ To backspace and delete the previous character, press
ⅷ To delete the next character that appears to the right of the blinking cursor, press
press
To consecutively delete several characters that appear to the right of the blinking cursor, press
and then keep pressing until the characters are deleted.
to open the Messaging program.
to open your SMS/MMS messaging account.
.
first and then
.
twice
ⅷ Press
ⅷ Press
Using the Full QWERTY Layout
Full QWERTY is a full onscreen QWERTY keyboard layout similar to a desktop computer keyboard.
8
1
7
2
3
4
6
5
1. Tap the keys to enter letters or symbols.
Tap and hold a key to enter a punctuation mark, symbol, or number shown on top of a key.
indicates you are in Predictive mode. Tap to change to Normal mode.
2.
indicates you are in Normal mode. Tap to change to Predictive mode.
3. Tap the Shift key to enter an uppercase letter.
Tap the Shift key twice to turn on Caps Lock.
4. Use the four arrow keys for directional movement on the screen.
5. Tap the Enter key to create a new line.
6. Tap the Back key to delete the previous character.
Section 2B. Entering Text
27
7. Tap
to open a keyboard layout that lets you easily enter numbers and symbols. See “Using Numeric
and Symbol Mode” for details.
8. Displays the word candidate list in predictive mode. Tap a word to insert it into your text. Tap
t to add
a word to the XT9 dictionary. (To learn how to enter text using Predictive mode, see “Using Predictive
To enter text using the Full QWERTY layout:
1. Start a program that accepts text input, such as Word Mobile.
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow, and then tap Full QWERTY.
3. Start tapping keys on the keyboard as you would on a computer keyboard to enter your text.
To enter accented characters:
1. Tap and hold a key with accent options (for example, vowels) to display the accented characters bar.
2. Slide your finger left or right on the screen to select the desired accented character.
3. When you have selected the desired accented character, release your finger to insert it to your text.
Symbol Mode” on page 31 for details.
28
Section 2B. Entering Text
Using the Phone Keypad
The Phone Keypad is an onscreen keypad that has a layout similar to mobile phone keypads, plus some
additional keys. The Phone keypad has large keys and enhanced input features such as predictive text input,,
which make it faster for you to enter text in your messages and documents.
8
1
7
2
3
4
6
5
1. Tap the keys to enter letters or symbols.
Tap and hold a key to enter a punctuation mark, symbol, or number shown on top of a key.
indicates you are in Predictive mode. Tap to change to Multitap mode.
2.
indicates you are in Multitap mode. Tap to change to Predictive mode.
3. Tap the Shift key to enter an uppercase letter.
Tap the Shift key twice to turn on Caps Lock.
4. Use the four arrow keys for directional movement on the screen.
5. Tap the Enter key to create a new line.
6. Tap the Back key to delete the previous character.
7. Tap
to open a keyboard layout that lets you easily enter numbers and symbols. See “Using Numeric
and Symbol Mode” for details.
8. Displays the word candidate list in predictive mode. Tap a word to insert it into your text. Tap
t to add
a word to the XT9 dictionary.
To enter text using the Phone keypad:
1. Start a program that accepts text input, such as Word Mobile.
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow, and then tap Phone Keypad.
3. When in Multitap mode (
), enter a character by tapping a key until the desired character is displayed
on the screen. As you tap the keys, the activated key displays just above the tapped key.
Ⅲ To enter the first letter that shows on a key, tap the key once. To enter the second letter, tap twice, and
so on.
Ⅲ To enter a punctuation mark, symbol, or number that appears at the top of a key, tap and hold the key.
4. You can also use the Predictive text input mode in Phone Keypad. For more information, see “Using
Section 2B. Entering Text
29
Using Predictive Mode
XT9 is a predictive text input mode that displays a word candidate list as you enter the first few characters so
you select just the word that you want.
To enter text using Predictive mode:
1. Make sure that the input mode is set to XT9 (
).
2. Start entering the first few letters of a word. As you enter each letter, predicted words will appear in the
word candidate bar above the onscreen keyboard.
3. Tap the desired word to insert it to your text. If the word is highlighted in the word candidate bar, you can
also tap the Enter key or the Space bar to insert it to your text.
If there are several words to choose from, touch the left or right directional arrow keys at the bottom of the
onscreen keyboard to navigate through the predicted words on the word candidate bar.
Note
To add a word to the XT9 dictionary:
If the word that you have entered is not found in the dictionary, you can add it to the dictionary.
1. While in Predictive mode, type a letter and then tap
on the right side of the word candidate bar.
2. Type the word you want to add and then tap
.
Add button
Cancel button
To customize Predictive mode settings:
1. Tap the Input Selector arrow, and then tap Touch Input Settings.
2. Tap the XT9 Settings tab, and then select or clear the following options according to your preferences:
Ⅲ Spell Correction. Lets you correct typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that
reflect the characters of the keys you have tapped as well as characters of nearby keys.
Ⅲ Word Completion in XT9 mode. Lets you select from a list of possible words based on the keys that you
have tapped and on the words available in the dictionary.
Ⅲ Word Completion in ABC mode (For Phone Keypad only). Lets you select from a list of possible combinations
based on the characters that appear on the keys that you tapped.
Ⅲ Auto-Substitution. Automatically inserts an apostrophe when you type common contracted words (for
example, “dont” automatically becomes “don’t”).
3. Tap ok.
30
Section 2B. Entering Text
Using Numeric and Symbol Mode
Switch to Numeric and Symbol mode to easily enter numbers and common symbols such as parentheses,
braces, currency signs, punctuation marks, and special characters.
Tap a number or symbol
to insert it into your text.
Tap to go to the previous or
next page of symbols.
Tap to switch back to the
letter keyboard layout.
Phone Keypad
Full QWERTY
To switch to Numeric and Symbol mode:
1. While using the Full QWERTY or Phone keypad, tap
.
2. Locate your desired number or symbol, and then tap it to insert it into your text.
To automatically switch to the letter keyboard layout:
By default, the onscreen keyboard in Numeric and Symbol mode is locked so you can continuously enter
symbols and numbers. Do the following if you want the onscreen keyboard to automatically switch to the
letter keyboard layout after you have selected a symbol.
1. Tap the Input Selector arrow and then tap Touch Input Settings.
2. On the Options tab, clear Turn on symbol lock.
3. Tap ok.
Section 2B. Entering Text
31
Section 2C
TouchFLO 3D
TouchFLO™ 3D gives you touch control over your Windows Mobile-powered device. TouchFLO 3D provides a Home
screen that allows finger-touch access to the most widely-used functions, such as People, Mail, Calendar,
Internet, Weather, and more. This section will show you how to navigate the TouchFLO 3D Home screen by
simply using finger gestures.
The TouchFLO 3D Home Screen
The TouchFLO 3D Home screen has the following tabs:
Home screen tabs
32
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Icon
Tab Name
Icon
Tab Name
Sprint Music
Home
People
Mail
Sprint Navigation
Sprint TV
Weather
Messages
Calendar
Stock
Internet
Settings
Photos and Videos
Switching Between Tabs on the Home Screen
ⅷ Touch or tap the desired tab on the Home screen.
— or —
ⅷ Press and hold your finger on the active tab, and then slide your finger right or left over the tabs. Release
when you have selected the desired tab.
Apply some pressure when pressing and holding on the active tab to be able to slide over the tabs.
Note
— or —
ⅷ Swipe left across the screen to move to the next tab, and swipe right across the screen to move to the
previous tab.
ⅷ When using the sliding QWERTY keyboard, press the right key to move to the next tab, and press the left
key to move to the previous tab.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
33
Navigating the Home screen in Landscape Mode
The TouchFLO 3D Home screen tabs are always displayed when the Home screen is in portrait view. When
you slide out the QWERTY keyboard, the Home screen automatically changes to landscape view and
temporarily hides the tabs. Touch the Expand button (
) at the bottom left side of the Home screen to
display the tabs.
Customizing Home Screen Tabs
You can rearrange or hide the tabs on the Home screen, except for the Home tab. The Settings tab cannot
be disabled and hidden also from the Home screen.
1. From the Home screen, slide your finger to the Settings tab, and then touch Customize Tabs.
2. To move a tab, touch and hold the icon before the tab name, and then drag it up or down the tabs list.
Release the icon when you reach the desired location.
3. To hide a tab, clear the check box at the right of the tab name.
4. Touch Done.
34
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Home
The Home tab displays the current date, a flip-style digital clock, and an alarm icon that indicates whether the
alarm is on or off. Missed calls, voicemails, and your upcoming calendar appointments are also shown on
the Home tab.
To select an item on the Home tab, simply touch the item.
1
2
3
4
1. Touch the clock to open the World Clock screen where you can select your location to automatically set
the date and time accordingly or you can manually change the date and time. You can also access the
Alarm Clock screen to change alarm clock settings.
2. Touch the Missed Call item to view details about missed calls in the Call History.
3. Touch an appointment to view or edit the details of the appointment. If there are no listed appointments
on the Home tab, touch Calendar to go to the Calendar tab and create new appointments. See “Calendar”
on page 76 for details.
4. Swipe upward on the screen to display the small digital clock and view more appointments. Swipe
downward on the screen to change back to the large flip-style digital clock.
When you are on another TouchFLO 3D tab, press the END key to return to the Home tab.
Tip
World Clock
On the Home tab, tap the digital clock to open the World Clock tab (
) where you can select the city
where you are located so that the Home tab displays your local time. If you do not find your city, touch Add
City to add it. The World Clock tab can display up to 10 cities.
You can also change the date and time of your local city, remove cities, or rearrange cities on the World
Clock tab.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
35
To change your local time, date and time zone:
1. On the World Clock screen, touch Menu > Local Time Settings.
2. Adjust the time (hour and minutes) by tapping the Up or Down arrow buttons.
3. Touch Date, select the date, year, and month, and then touch Select.
4. Touch City. The Select Country screen then appears.
5. Flick your finger on the screen or use the Quick Scroll bar on the right of the screen to scroll through the
country list. Touch the desired country to select it.
6. The Select City screen then appears. Flick your finger on the screen or use the Quick Scroll bar on the
right of the screen to scroll through the city list. Touch the desired city to set your time zone.
You can also slowly scroll through the country or city list by dragging your finger upward on the screen, or enter
the country or city name in the search box.
Tip
7. Tap Done.
When you synchronize your device with your computer, the time on your device is updated with the time on your
Note
computer.
36
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Alarm Clock
On the Home tab, tap the digital clock, and then touch the Alarm Clock tab (
) if you want to set up your
device as an alarm clock. You can set up to three alarms.
To set an alarm:
1. On the Alarm Clock screen, touch an alarm time.
2. On the Set Alarm screen, adjust the alarm time (hour and minutes), and then tap the day of the week for
the alarm.
Select multiple days by tapping each desired day. Tap a selected day to exclude it from the alarm.
Tip
3. Enter the alarm description, select the alarm ring tone, and then choose whether you want the device to
vibrate when the alarm goes off.
4. Tap Done.
5. On the Alarm Clock screen, tap the OFF/ON slider to turn on the alarm.
When an alarm goes off, you have the choice to Snooze or Dismiss the alarm. When you select Snooze, the
alarm will sound again after 5 minutes.
Note
People
On the People tab, you can add favorite contacts and quickly make calls or send text and email messages to
these contacts.
From the People tab, you can also set up your own contact card, create new contacts, view your stored
contacts list, as well as view exchanged calls and text, multimedia and email messages with a contact. If
your contacts have Facebook accounts, you can check if they have any Facebook updates and events.
You need an active data or wireless network connection to the Internet to link to Facebook.
Note
Setting Up My Contact Card
My Contact Card automatically opens the first time that you access the People tab. You can enter and save
your contact information on My Contact Card so you can easily share and send it to your contacts. If you
have a Facebook account, you can also sync your Facebook profile with My Contact Card so you can
receive instant notifications everytime you or your Facebook friends change profiles or post events.
1. From the Home screen, slide your finger to the People tab.
2. When the My Contact Card screen appears, tap Next.
Tap Skip if you prefer to set up My Contact Card later. You can open My Contact Card from the Settings tab of
the TouchFLO 3D Home screen, or from the contacts list of the All Contacts screen.
Note
3. On the subsequent screen, choose how to add your photo to your contact card. You can use the Camera
to take your photo, or if you have a Facebook account, login to your account and sync with your
Facebook profile.
When the Link Profile window opens, select the Facebook information that you want to link, and then tap Done.
Note
4. On the Detail Information screen, enter your information in the fields provided. You can scroll down the
screen to view more fields.
5. When finished entering information, tap Next, and then tap Done on the subsequent screen to return to
the People tab.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
37
Creating New Contacts
From the People tab, you can easily create and store the contact details of the people and businesses that
you communicate with.
1. On the People tab, touch All Contacts.
2. The All Contacts screen then opens and displays the All tab (
). Touch New to create a new contact.
3. To add the contact’s photo, touch the square box on the upper-right side of the New Contact Card
screen. You can link to the contact’s Facebook photo, select an existing photo in Album, or open Camera
and take a photo of the contact.
4. Enter the contact information in the fields provided and then tap Done.
• To link with the contact’s Facebook account, scroll down the New Contact Card screen and then tap Link. For
Tips
• Tap More at the bottom of the New Contact Card screen to enter additional contact information from
Adding and Selecting Favorite Contacts
You need to have contacts already stored on your device before you can add them as favorite contacts to
the People tab. If there are no existing contacts, create them first on your device. See “Creating New
Contacts” for instructions.
To add favorite contacts:
You can add up to 15 favorite contacts on the People tab.
1. On the People tab, touch one of the Plus (+) icons, or touch Add Favorite.
2. On the Select a Contact screen, touch the name of the desired contact.
3. Select a phone number or email address to associate to the favorite contact.
If there is no picture associated with the contact, the Album program opens and lets you take a photo of
the contact or select an existing contact photo. For more information about Album, see “Viewing Photos
4. To add another favorite contact, touch the small Plus icon (
) at the right side of the Home screen’s
People tab and repeat steps 2 and 3.
38
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
To select a favorite contact:
1. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ To flip through the contact pictures one at a time, swipe your finger up or down the screen.
Ⅲ On the picture strip at the right side of the People tab:
● Touch the picture of the desired favorite contact.
— or —
● Press and hold on the currently selected contact picture to display a slideout bar, and then slide up or
down the picture strip. Release your finger when the desired contact is selected.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
39
2. After selecting a favorite contact, you can do any of the following to communicate with that contact:
Ⅲ Touch the contact’s name, phone number, or email address that is displayed below the contact picture
to call or send an email message. For more information about making a call or composing and
158.
Ⅲ Touch one of the following icons to choose a phone number to call, or to send a message:
Call the contact’s mobile phone.
Call the contact’s work/office phone.
Call the contact’s home phone.
Compose and send a text message.
Compose and send an email message.
The icons shown depend on available contact information. For example, the home phone icon (
is shown only if the stored contact information includes a home phone number.
)
Ⅲ Touch the picture of the favorite contact on the center screen to open the Contact Details screen, and
details.
To remove the current favorite contact, touch Menu > Remove Favorite.
Tip
The All Contacts Screen
Touch All Contacts on the Home tab or People tab to display the All Contacts screen where you can view and
manage all your contacts. The All Contacts screen has the following tabs:
1
2
3
4
1. All. Lists all your stored contacts. This tab lets you create, delete, or edit a contact. Touch a contact to
open the Contact Details screen. You can also use this tab to open or update My Contact Card.
2. Favorites. Shows the favorite contacts that you have added to the People tab. You can also add favorite
contacts through this tab.
3. Updates and Events. Displays notifications when there are updates that occurred in Facebook. This tab also
4. Call History. Lists all your dialed numbers, and received and missed calls. See “Call History” on page 63
for details.
40
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Browsing the Contacts List
On the All Contacts screen’s All tab, swipe upward or downward on the screen to scroll through the contacts
list. You can also use the search box or the Quick Scroll bar to search for a certain contact.
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
2. Touch Me to edit your own contact contact information. See “Setting Up My Contact Card” on page 37 for
details.
3. Touch a contact to open the Contact Details screen.
4. An exclamation point icon appears on a contact when:
Ⅲ You receive a new text or email message, or when you have a missed call from the contact.
Ⅲ The contact has updated his or her Facebook profile or added events in Facebook.
5. To quickly scroll down through the contacts list, touch and hold the Quick Scroll bar and then slide your
finger downward.
6. Touch the seach icon to display the search box so you can find a contact by entering the contact name.
When you slide open the QWERTY keyboard and the screen switches to landscape view, the search box is
automatically displayed. You can use the QWERTY keyboard to enter and search for a contact.
Note
7. Touch this icon to send My Contact Card as an attachment in a multimedia message.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
41
The Contact Details Screen
When you touch a contact name in the All tab of the All Contacts screen or touch the picture of a favorite
contact on the center screen of the People tab, the Contact Details screen opens. From this screen, you can
view the contact’s details, exchange of messages and calls with the contact, and more.
The Contact Details screen has the following tabs:
1
2
3
4
5
1. Details. Shows a contact’s details. From this tab, you can call the contact, send a text or email message,
edit the contact details, or delete the contact.
2. Messages. Displays exchanged text and multimedia messages with the contact. You can also reply with a
text message directly on this tab.
3. Email. Displays all received email messages from the contact.
4. Updates and Events. Displays notifications when the contact has updates on his or her Facebook account.
This tab also shows events of the contact. See “Facebook Updates and Events” on page 42 for details.
5. Call History. Lists all your incoming, outgoing, and missed calls to and from the contact. This tab also lets
Facebook Updates and Events
If you and your stored contacts have Facebook accounts and you linked to Facebook when you were
creating My Contact Card, you can easily check which of your contacts have updates that occurred in
Facebook. The types of Facebook updates include changes in profile information and status as well as new
photos added to the Facebook album.
You can also easily check which contacts have events that occur on the current day. The types of events
include the birthday and anniversary, if specified and stored on the contact details, as well as events that are
created in Facebook.
Checking for Contacts Who Have Facebook Updates and Events
You can check for Facebook updates and events of contacts from one convenient location, which is on the
Updates and Events tab of the All Contacts screen.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All Contacts.
2. Tap the Updates and Events tab (
).
3. If you haven’t linked your stored contacts to Facebook, the Updates and Events tab will show a Link
Profiles option. Tap this option, choose which contacts you want to link to Facebook, and then tap Next.
4. On the Link Profiles window, select or clear the Facebook information that you want to link, and then tap
Done.
5. In the Updates list, when you tap a contact who has only one type of Facebook update, Opera Mobile
opens and brings you to your Facebook site where you can view details of the contact’s Facebook
update.
6. When you tap a contact who has multiple Facebook updates, the Contact Details screen opens and
displays the Updates and Events tab of this contact. See “Checking a Single Contact’s Facebook
Updates and Events” on page 43 for details.
42
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
7. In the Events list, tap a contact to send a greeting via a text message to the contact or view the contact
details. If an event is a Facebook event, tap it to open Opera Mobile and view information about that
event.
• To manually refresh and display the latest Facebook updates, tap Menu > Update Now.
Notes
• To enable the Facebook updates to be refreshed automatically, tap Menu > Data Connection Setting and
then select the Download data automatically check box. The refresh is not instant. Your device checks
from Facebook in a fixed time period.
Checking a Single Contact’s Facebook Updates and Events
To check only for a single contact’s Facebook updates and his or her events, access the Updates and Events
tab from the Contact Details screen.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All Contacts to open the All Contacts screen.
2. Browse through the list of contacts and then tap a contact to open the Contact Details screen.
3. Tap the Updates and Events tab (
).
4. In the Updates list, tap a Facebook update to Opera Mobile and view details of that update.
5. In the Events list, tap an event to send a greeting via a text message to the contact or view the
contact details. If it is a Facebook event, tap it to access your Facebook site and view information
about that event.
Changing Your Status in Facebook
You can change your status in Facebook directly from your own contact card.
1. On the All tab of the All Contacts screen, tap Me to open My Contact Card.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the screen and then tap the button that displays your status.
3. Enter your new status and then tap Done.
Logging Out From Facebook
To log out from your Facebook account, open My Contact Card, scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then
tap the message that says “Tap to logout.”
Reconnecting to Facebook
Do one of the following:
ⅷ Open My Contact Card, scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap the message that says “Login to
my facebook”.
ⅷ On the Updates and Events tab of the All Contacts screen, tap Link.
ⅷ On the Updates and Events tab of a single contact, tap Link Profiles.
On the Facebook Login screen, enter the email address and password that you use for your Facebook
account.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
43
Mail
The Mail tab is where you send and receive email messages. Including Outlook Email, you can add up to
seven POP3/IMAP4 and Web-based email accounts in this tab. For instructions on how to set up email
accounts in the Mail tab, see “Email Messaging” on page 158.
Checking and Reading Email
The icon on the Mail tab and the respective icons of your email accounts show the number of newly
received or unread email messages. Select an email account and then swipe your finger up or down on the
center screen to browse through received email messages.
5
1
4
3
2
1. Touch the email on the screen to open and read the message.
2. Touch Inbox to access all email messages of the currently selected account.
3. Touch Menu to choose whether to add an email account, send and receive email, and more.
4. These are your email accounts. To select an email account:
Ⅲ Touch an email account icon to view the email messages in that account.
– or –
Ⅲ Touch and hold the icon of the email account that is currently displayed, and then drag your finger up
or down the account icons until the desired email account is selected.
5. After selecting an email account, touch this icon to create and send a new email message.
Making Calls Directly from an Email Message
You can directly call the sender of the email message that is currently shown on the Mail tab by pressing the
Talk key.
For more information about directly making calls while viewing email, see “Making a Call from an Email
44
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Messages
On the Messages tab, you can read text messages as they arrive and create a new text message. To flip
through received text messages, swipe your finger up or down the screen.
5
1
2
3
4
1. Touch the text message to open the Messages tab of the Contact Details screen where you can view all
received text messages from the contact and reply to the sender.
2. The icon on the Messages tab shows the number of unread text messages.
3. Touch All Messages to access all text messages in your inbox and other folders.
4. Touch Menu to choose whether to remove the current message and access more options.
5. Touch the New icon to create a new text message.
For more information about working with text messages, see “Text Messaging (SMS)” on page 131.
Making Calls Directly from a Text Message
While reading a text message on the Messages tab, you can directly call the sender of the text message by
pressing the Talk key.
For more information about making calls while viewing text messages, see “Making a Call from a Text
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
45
Calendar
Keep track of your important appointments by adding them on the Calendar tab.
Creating an Appointment
You can create appointments for the current day which is highlighted on the month calendar, or you can
select another date for creating your new appointments.
1. If you are creating an appointment for the current date, touch Menu > New. Otherwise, touch another date
on the calendar, and then touch New Appointment.
To select another month in the calendar, swipe our finger up or down the screen. You can also tap the Up or
Down arrow shown beside the month and year.
Note
2. Enter a name for the appointment, and then specify the location.
3. If there is a time frame for the appointment, set the start and end dates and times. If it is a special
occasion such as a birthday or a whole-day event, set the All Day option to Yes.
4. When finished, tap ok to return to the Calendar tab.
Viewing and Managing Your Appointments
On the Calendar tab, dates with appointments are indicated by a triangle (
the date box.
) at the upper-right corner of
1. Touch a date on the calendar to switch to Day view. The screen displays all your appointments and the
weather information for that day.
The weather information appears only if you have set your local time to a city on the World Clock tab, and if the
“Weather” on page 54 for details.
Note
2. Touch an appointment to view its details, and then touch Menu to edit, send, or delete the appointment.
Tip
• You can also use the Windows Mobile Calendar program to create, view, and send appointments. To open the
Calendar program, touch Start > All Programs > Calendar. For more information about using Windows
Mobile Calendar, refer to the “Help & How-To” topics on the Windows Mobile website.
46
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Internet
On the Internet tab, you can browse the Web, search information, and add push Web pages. This tab also
lets you enable Push Internet to update the contents of your push Web pages before you browse them.
Navigating the Web
The Internet tab uses Opera Mobile™ as the Web browser.
1
2
3
4
7
5
6
1. To search for information on the Web using Opera Mobile, enter your text in the provided text box and
then touch the Search icon ( ).
2. Touch the globe image or touch Launch Browser to browse the Web using Opera Mobile.
3. Touch YouTube to watch YouTube videos.
4. Touch Add a new Push page to choose a website that you want to add as a push page.
5. Touch Bookmarks to add, view or delete Web favorites in Opera Mobile.
6. Touch Menu and choose whether to delete a push page, adjust the update settings for your push Web
pages and bookmarks, and more.
7. Swipe your finger upward when you need to scroll down the screen.
When you open a Web page in Opera Mobile, the page may be displayed in its smallest size. To reformat Web
pages to fit the screen of your device so that the content is readable, set Opera Mobile to display in Mobile View.
Note
Tap
, tap Settings > Display, and then select the Mobile view check box.
For more information about navigating the Web with Opera Mobile, see “Using Opera Mobile” on page 145.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
47
Setting Up Push Internet
Set up Push Internet on the Internet tab so that you can have frequently visited Web pages preloaded and
ready for display on Opera Mobile anytime.
Adding a Push Web Page
You can add up to four push Web pages for quick access on the Internet tab.
1. On the Internet tab, touch Add a new push page.
2. On the New Push Page screen, you can select a bookmark and add it as a push page, or you can enter
a title name and the address (URL) of a desired website.
3. From the Frequency choices, select a time interval for automatically updating the push page, and then
touch Save.
Push Internet Settings
Set your device to automatically update your push Web pages on the Internet tab to ensure that you are
browsing the most recent information that is available on your favorite websites. The updated push pages
are cached in the device memory so that they load faster in Opera Mobile.
To change the auto update time for your push Web pages:
1. On the Internet tab, touch Menu > Schedule Settings.
2. Under Day and Time, select the day or days you want to auto update your push Web pages, and then
specify the update time.
3. Scroll down the screen to the Frequency section, and then touch the update time below each of your push
Web pages to set the time interval for automatic updates.
4. Tap Done to return to the Internet tab.
To enable or disable Push Internet:
1. On the Internet tab, touch Menu > Data Settings.
2. Touch the OFF/ON slider to enable or disable the following options:
Ⅲ Push Internet. Enable (default) or disable Push Internet.
Ⅲ Roaming. Enable this option if you want to update your push Web pages and bookmarks even when
you are roaming. This may incur additional data charges. This option is disabled by default.
48
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Photos and Videos
The Photos and Videos tab lets you flip through your photos and video clips and view them full-screen. From
this tab, you can also launch the camera so you can take pictures and record video clips.
5
4
1
3
2
1. To flip through photos and videos, swipe your finger up or down the screen. Touch the photo or video on
the screen to view or play it full-screen.
3. Touch Slideshow to view the photos as a slideshow. If a video is selected, touch Play.
4. Touch the video camera icon to shoot video.
5. Touch the camera icon to take a photo.
• The file formats that can be viewed on the Photos and Videos tab are the same as the Album program.
Tips
• To transfer media files from a computer and view them on the Photos and Videos tab, copy or synchronize
them to a folder under \My Device (the device memory) or \Storage Card.
Setting an Album as a Favorite
The Photos and Videos tab displays pictures and video files from the current favorite album. By default, the
Camera Shots album, which stores the pictures and videos that you captured using the device camera, is set
as the favorite. You can change to another favorite album, if preferred.
1. On the Photos and Videos tab, touch Album to open the Album program.
2. Touch Albums and then select one of the listed favorite albums.
3. Tap Menu > Set Album as Favorite. and then tap OK on the confirmation screen.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
49
Sprint Music
The Sprint Music tab allows you to visually browse through albums and music tracks that are on your device
and play music. The albums and music tracks that you see on this tab are from the Now Playing list of the
Library.
Your device searches for all music files that have the following audio formats: MP3 (.mp3), WMA (.wma), AAC/
AAC+ (.aac), and MPEG-4 (.m4a). It searches for music from the following locations:
Device: \My Music (including all subfolders)
Note
\My Documents (including all subfolders)
Storage: \Storage Card (including all subfolders)
From the Sprint Music tab, you can also access the Sprint Music Store to purchase and download music. For
more information about purchasing and downloading music onto your device, see “Music — Sprint Music
Playing Music
ᮣ On the Sprint Music tab, flip through albums and all the music in each album, and then touch the
Play icon (
) to start playback.
1
7
6
5
2
3
4
1. Touch Sprint Music Store to download music from Sprint Music Store. See “Music — Sprint Music Store” on
2. Swipe upward or downward on the screen to flip through albums and the music or songs in an album.
4. Touch Menu to set music playback to repeat, turn shuffle on or off, and more.
5. Touch the Down arrow icon to go to the next album or the next music in the current album.
6. Touch the Play icon to play or the Pause icon to pause playback.
7. Touch the up arrow icon to go to the previous album or the previous music in the current album.
50
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
To advance forward or backward in the music:
ᮣ Touch and hold on the thin bar below the album art to display the progress bar:
Drag your finger right or left on the progress bar to move forward or backward in the current music.
To set repeat and shuffle modes:
The icons on the upper-right side of the Sprint Music tab show whether repeat and shuffle modes are
enabled.
Repeat [One]
Repeat [All]
Shuffle [On]
ⅷ Touch Menu > Repeat and choose whether to repeat the current track, repeat all tracks in the current album
or playlist, or do not repeat.
ⅷ To turn shuffle mode on or off, touch Menu > Shuffle and then select Shuffle On or Shuffle Off.
The Library
The Library organizes music into categories, such as Now Playing, Artists, Albums, Genres, All Songs, and more.
When you add more albums or music tracks to your device, go to the Library to locate and play the new
albums or music tracks.
To browse and play music in the Library:
1. On the Music tab, touch Library to open the Library screen.
2. The tabs at the bottom of the Library screen correspond to the different categories. To browse music
under a certain category, slide to the tab that corresponds to the desired category.
3. Keep tapping an item on a category tab (for example, an artist) until the music tracks display on the
screen.
4. Tap a music track to play it.
When you select a category in the Library such as Artists and play its music, the Now Playing list will be replaced
with the music tracks from that category.
Note
Playlists
You can group your favorite music into a playlist and then play back the playlist.
To create a new playlist:
1. Select the desired music on the Music tab or the Library.
2. Touch Menu > Add to Playlist.
3. Touch Create new playlist, enter a playlist name, and then touch Done.
To add more music files to a playlist:
1. On the Library, slide to the Playlists tab, and then touch a playlist to open it.
2. Touch the plus icon at the upper-right side of the screen, or touch Menu > Add Songs, and then slide to the
All Songs tab.
3. Select the check boxes of the music tracks you want to add to the playlist, or touch Menu > Select All to
choose all tracks.
4. Touch Done to add the selected tracks to the playlist.
5. Touch Back to return to the Playlists tab.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
51
To play back a playlist:
1. On the Playlists tab, touch a playlist to open it.
2. Touch the first track in the playlist. The Music tab starts playing the first track. After each track, the next one
in the playlist will be played.
Playlists are not automatically updated when music files have been deleted from the device memory or the
microSD card.
Note
Types of Playlists
There are two types of playlists that can be shown on the Playlists tab:
ⅷ Custom playlists. Playlists that are created on the Music tab.
ⅷ Windows Media Player playlists. Playlists that are in Windows Media Player Mobile’s Library (which is
synchronized with Windows Media Player on your computer). They are indicated by the Windows Media
Player icon (
). These playlists cannot be edited.
If a Windows Media Player playlist contains a combination of music, video and image files, only music files in the
playlist will be synchronized to your device and other media types will be filtered out.
Note
Sprint Navigation
The Sprint Navigation tab allows you to connect to Sprint’s wireless data network and use GPS navigation
services. If this is your first time to use Sprint Navigation, touching any of the icons on this tab will prompt you
to log into the Sprint Navigation service.
For more information about using Sprint Navigation, see “Using Sprint Navigation” on page 183.
52
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Sprint TV
On the Sprint TV tab, you can watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your favorite shows – anywhere on
the Nationwide Sprint Network.
4
1
2
3
1. If this is your first time to use Sprint TV, touch the center image to connect to Sprint data services using
the data connection and download channels. Afterwards, touch the displayed channel on the center of
the screen to watch the channel.
2. Touch Update Now to download the latest preset channel list from Sprint.
3. Touch Launch to open the Sprint TV application so you can connect to Sprint data services, access all
available channels, and choose to which channels you want to subscribe.
4. Preset channel selections are listed on the strip at the right side of the screen.
To watch a preset channel:
ᮣ Touch the icon on the right that corresponds to the desired channel.
— or —
Press and hold on the highlighted channel icon to display a slide-out bar, and then slide your finger up or
down. Release your finger when you have selected the desired channel.
For more information about using Sprint TV, see “TV” on page 169.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
53
Weather
The Weather tab shows the current weather as well as weather information for the next four days of the week.
This tab can display weather information of up to 10 cities.
Your device automatically connects to the Internet via the data connection or Wi-Fi to download and display
weather information. The current temperature, temperature range, type of weather (sunny, cloudy, showers,
or other), and the weather information for the next four days of the week are shown on the Weather tab.
3
1
2
1. To switch between cities, swipe your finger up or down the screen.
2. Touch Menu to add or delete a city, change the temperature to Celsius or Fahrenheit, and more.
3. Shows the last weather update. Touch this item or touch Update Now at the bottom-left side of the screen
to download the latest weather information.
To add a city:
1. On the Weather tab, touch Menu > Add Location.
2. The Select Country screen then appears. Flick or drag your finger on the screen, or use the Quick Scroll
bar on the right side of the screen when scrolling the country list. Touch the desired country to select it.
3. The Select City screen then appears. Flick or drag your finger on the screen, or use the Quick Scroll bar
on the right side of the screen when scrolling the city list. Touch the desired city to select it.
You can also enter the country or city name in the provided search box.
Tip
To choose download options:
1. On the Weather tab, touch Menu > Settings.
2. You can choose from the following options:
Ⅲ Download weather automatically. When this option is selected, weather information is automatically
downloaded whenever you select the Weather tab, if the data has not been updated within the last three
hours. Weather data is also downloaded every time an ActiveSync connection is established.
Ⅲ Download weather when roaming. Select this option only if you want to allow automatic download of
weather data when roaming. This may incur additional costs.
54
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Stock
The Stock tab allows you to add, view, and analyze stocks and stock market movements using updated
financial information.
Downloading stock or stock market information may incur additional fees from your wireless service provider.
Contact your service provider for details.
Note
Adding Stock Quotes
You can add up to 14 stock quotes or stock market indexes on the Stock tab.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Stock tab.
2. If this is your first time to add a stock quote or index, touch Add Stock. Otherwise, touch Menu > Add Stock.
3. On the Add Stock screen, enter the company name, stock market index, or ticker symbol in the search
box, and then touch the Search icon (
).
4. Tap the company name, stock market index, or ticker symbol to add it to the Stock tab.
Viewing Stock Information
The Stock tab lists all your stock quotes and stock market indexes including the current price or volume, and
the change in price or volume from the previous trading day. The change in price or volume box indicates
whether the stock or stock market has gained (green) or declined (red).
5
1
4
3
2
1. Touch a stock quote to view more details. Swipe your finger upward to scroll down the list of stock quotes
on the Stock tab.
2. Touch Menu to add, delete or rearrange the stock quotes on the Stock tab.
3. Shows the current trading price or volume.
4. Touch the green or red box to switch between showing the change in points/price or percentage from
the previous trading day.
5. Shows the last stock information update. Touch this item or touch Update Now at the bottom-left side of
the screen to download the latest stock information.
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
55
Settings
The Settings tab allows you to synchronize information with your computer or the Exchange Server, change
sound settings such as the ring tone, manage the communications features of your device such as Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth, and more. You will find the following settings on this tab:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Sync Data. Opens ActiveSync to connect and synchronize your device with the computer or Exchange
Server. (See “Synchronizing Information With Your Computer” on page 69 and “Starting Synchronization”
2. Sound. Allows you to set the sound profile, ring tone, and more.
3. Wallpaper. Allows you to change the wallpaper of the Home tab, or change the wallpaper back to the
default background.
4. Communications. Opens Comm Manager where you can easily turn features such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
5. Customize Tabs. Allows you to move or rearrange the Home screen tabs. (See “Customizing Home Screen
Tabs” on page 34 for details.)
6. My Contact Card. Allows you to set up My Contact Card. (See “Setting Up My Contact Card” on page 37 for
details.)
7. Mail Setup. Allows you to set up email accounts. (See “Email Messaging” on page 158 for details.)
8. G-Sensor. Allows you to enable or disable auto screen rotation and calibrate the device’s G-Sensor.
9. All Settings. Provides you access to all the settings of your device. (See “Managing Your Device” on page
56
Section 2C. TouchFLO 3D
Section 2D
Using Phone Features
The same as with a standard mobile phone, you can use your device to make, receive, keep track of calls, and send text
messages. This section will show you how to use the phone features of your device.
Displaying Your Phone Number
In case you forget what your phone number is, you can check your number from the Phone screen.
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Tap Menu > My Phone Number. (Your phone number and account information will be displayed.)
• To view information about your device, tap Menu > Device Information on the Phone screen.
Notes
• Your Sprint phone number is the same for both CDMA and GSM (international roaming).
Making Calls from the Phone Screen
The Phone program’s Smart Dial feature makes it easy for you to call a phone number or contact. When you
start entering a phone number or contact name, Smart Dial automatically searches and sorts the contact
entries in Contacts and the phone numbers in Call History (including incoming, outgoing, and missed calls).
You can then select the desired number or contact to call from the filtered list.
You can enter the first letter of the name or number of a contact. Smart Dial will search for contact phone
numbers and the first character of a contact name as well as from the character that appears after a space,
dash, or underscore in a contact name. For example, if you tap
, which is associated with [a, b, and c]
on the Phone keypad, contact names such as “Ben Miller,” “George Adams,” “John-Carter,” “Carter, Ellen,”
“Dixon, Allan,” “Thomas_Clark,” “JaneCampbell” would appear as matches.
If the matching list is long and you want to narrow down the search further, enter another letter. Using the
same example above, if you continue to tap “3” which is associated with [d, e, f], the matching list will be
narrowed down to the following names: “Ben Miller,” “George Adams,” “Carter, Ellen,” “Dixon, Allan.”
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
57
Calling a Phone Number or Contact
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Begin entering the first few numbers or characters by tapping the keys on the Phone keypad. As you
enter numbers or letters, the Smart Dial panel will display matches found.
If you tapped a wrong number or character, tap
the entire entry, tap and hold
to erase each subsequent digit or character. To erase
.
3. Tap to close the Phone keypad and to see if there are more matching numbers or contacts in the
Smart Dial panel. To browse through the filtered list, flick through the list or slide your finger up or down
the list slowly.
Smart Dial
panel
4. To call a number or contact, either:
Ⅲ Tap the desired phone number or contact from the list.
— or —
Ⅲ Call a different phone number associated with the displayed contact by tapping the contact card
icon ( ) at the right side of the contact name. On the Contact Details screen, tap the number you
want to call.
• When in a call, use the Volume Up or Down button on the side of the device to adjust the phone volume.
Tips
• After entering the first few digits and the phone number you are dialing is not found in your contacts, a Save
to Contacts? button will appear above the Phone keypad. Tap it to save the number to your Contacts.
• To save a phone number listed on the Phone screen to your Contacts, tap
.
• To send a text message to a contact listed on the Phone screen, tap his or her contact card icon (
) and
58
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
Global Smart Dialing (International Calls)
When the Global Smart Dialing feature is enabled, placing international calls is a lot easier. You can
preconfigure the country where you are calling from and the country to call to, and then simply enter
the 10-digit number when placing your international call. Both the international access code and country
code will automatically be prepended to the number.
Configuring Global Smart Dialing
To enable Global Smart Dialing and preconfigure the dialing codes:
1. Press the Talk key to open the Phone screen.
2. Tap Menu, scroll down the menu, and then tap Global Smart Dialing.
3. Select the Enable Global Smart Dialing check box.
4. By default, the international access code has already been set to that for the United States. You do not
need to change it if you are making international calls from the United States.
However, if you are placing international calls from another country, select the country in which you are
located from the Dial from list. If the country is not in the list, enter its international access code in the
International Direct Dialing Code box.
5. Select the country to which you are calling from the Dial to list. The corresponding country code will
appear in the Country Code box. (You cannot change the country code.)
6. Tap Done.
You can also configure Global Smart Dialing to automatically prepend the U.S. country code (1) when you place
domestic calls. Select United States from both the Dial from and Dial to lists. When you place your call, you only
need enter the 10-digit number.
Note
Using Global Smart Dialing
To use Global Smart Dialing to place an international call:
1. On the Phone screen, directly enter the 10-digit number to call. This number includes the area code and
phone number.
2. Tap
on the Phone screen or press the Talk key to place the call. Your device will dial the
complete number including the international access code, the country code, and the 10-digit number,
Direct Dial
When Global Smart Dialing is not enabled, or when the number you want to call (area code and phone number)
contains fewer than 10 digits, you need to use direct dialing to place international calls.
Note
To use direct dialing to place an international call:
ᮣ Enter the international access code, the country code, the city or area code, and the phone number, and
then tap
to complete the call.
Calling Voicemail
ᮣ
is reserved for your voicemail. Tap and hold
on the Phone keypad to call voicemail and
retrieve your voicemail messages. For more information about using voicemail, see “Voicemail” on
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
59
Making Calls from the TouchFLO 3D Home Screen
You can add favorite contacts to the Home screen’s People tab and easily place calls to your favorite
From the Home screen’s People tab, you can also access the complete list of stored contacts and select a
contact to call. See “Browsing the Contacts List” on page 41 and “The Contact Details Screen” on page 42
for details.
You can also use Windows Mobile’s Contacts program to access your stored contacts and select a contact to call.
Tip
Answering and Ending Calls
Your device notifies you of incoming calls in the following ways:
ⅷ The device rings or vibrates.
ⅷ The Talk key flashes a white light.
ⅷ The backlight illuminates, if your device was in sleep mode.
ⅷ The device displays the Incoming Voice Call screen. If the incoming call is from a phone number stored in
your Contacts, the caller’s name is displayed. The caller’s phone number and picture may also be
displayed, if available.
Accepting or Rejecting an Incoming Call
When there is an incoming call, you can choose to accept or reject the call.
To answer the call:
ᮣ Press the Talk key.
— or —
On the incoming call screen, slide the center button of the Answer/Ignore bar to the left.
To mute the ringing sound without rejecting the call:
ᮣ Tap Mute Ring when you receive an incoming call.
— or —
Press the Volume Down button.
— or —
Place your device face down.
To reject the call:
ᮣ Press the End key.
— or —
On the Incoming Voice Call screen, slide the center button of the Answer/Ignore bar to the right.
60
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
To reject a call and send a text message:
When you reject a call, you can choose to automatically send a text message to the caller.
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Options... > Advanced tab.
2. Select the Reject call with text message check box.
3. Change the default text message if needed, and then tap ok.
When Reject call with text message is enabled, tap Send Text to reject the call and send the text message to
the caller.
You can automatically send a default text message to the caller and reject the incoming voice call. Tap Send
Text when you have an incoming call to send the text message. You can change the default text message by
tapping Menu > Options > Advanced tab while on the Phone screen.
Ending a Call
When a call is in progress, tapEnd Call or press the End key to hang up.
In-Call Options
When a call is in progress, use the onscreen buttons to turn on the speakerphone, put a call on hold, accept
a second call and swap between the callers, set up a three-way call, and more.
For more information about starting a three-way call, see “Making a Three-Way Call” on page 137.
Putting a Call on Hold
1. Tap the Hold onscreen button or press the Talk key to take the second call, and put the first one on hold.
2. To end the second call and return to the first call, tap End Call or press the End key on your device.
Swapping Between Two Calls
ᮣ Tap the Talk onscreen button.
— or —
Press the Talk key on your device.
Writing Down Notes While in a Call
1. Tap
or pull out the stylus.
2. The Notes program automatically opens, with some information already entered in the notes, such as the
caller name, phone number, and more. Use the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard to
enter additional notes. For more information about using the sliding QWERTY keyboard and onscreen
3. When you have finished entering your notes, tap ok to save your notes.
The file is saved in the Notes file list. To open the program and locate your file, tap Start > All Programs > Notes.
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
61
Turning On and Off the Speakerphone
During a call, do one of the following to turn the speakerphone on or off:
ᮣ Tap
— or —
to turn the speakerphone on. Tap this button again to turn the speakerphone off.
Placing your device face down automatically turns on the speakerphone. To turn the speakerphone off,
place your device face up.
— or —
You can also press and hold the Talk key during a call to turn the speakerphone on or off.
The speakerphone icon (
appears in the title bar when the speakerphone is on.
Note
)
To avoid damage to your hearing, do not hold your device against your ear when the speakerphone is
turned on.
WARNING
Muting the Microphone During a Call
ᮣ Tap
to turn the microphone on or off. When the microphone is turned off, the mute icon (
)
appears on the screen.
Turning Noise Reduction On or Off
When you are using the earpiece and not the speakerphone during a call, you can tap Menu > Noise
Reduction On to reduce ambient noise if the other party cannot hear your voice clearly. When noise reduction
is not needed, tap Menu > Noise Reduction Off to disable it and save battery power.
You can also turn noise reduction on or off in the Phone settings. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Personal
tab > Phone > Advanced tab and then select one of the following settings in the Reduce noise in phone calls
drop-down list:
ⅷ Automatically. Analyzes ambient noise only at the beginning of a connected call and applies a certain noise
reduction setting based on the detected noise. However, when you move to a noisier environment during
the call, your device will not further decrease noise based on your new location.
ⅷ Always. Always reduces ambient noise during the entire course of your phone call.
ⅷ Never. Turns off noise reduction.
• If you want to change the noise reduction setting to Automatically, make sure to do this before starting a call.
Notes
• Noise reduction is not used when you have a wired or Bluetooth headset connected.
62
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
Checking Missed Calls
Missed Call Notification
There are several ways your device alerts you when you have missed calls:
ⅷ The missed call icon (
) is displayed in the title bar.
ⅷ The number of missed calls is shown on the TouchFLO 3D Home tab.
To check who the caller was:
ᮣ Tap the title bar to display the Notifications screen, and then tap the missed call notification message.
— or —
On the TouchFLO 3D Home tab, tap the Call History or Missed Call item. (For more information about the
— or —
On the Phone screen, tap
or tap Menu > Call History.
Call History
Call History shows you your incoming calls, outgoing calls, and missed calls. Call History makes redialing a
number fast and easy. It is continually updated as new numbers are added to the beginning of the list and
the oldest entries are removed from the bottom of the list.
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and Contacts entry name (if the phone number is in
your Contacts). An icon appears to the left of the number, and it indicates the type of call:
Missed. These are incoming calls that you were not able to answer, and they
are routed to your voicemail.
Received. These are incoming calls that were answered.
Dialed. These are outgoing calls that you made.
• Call History records only those calls that occur while the device is turned on. If a call is received while your
device is turned off, it will not be added to the Call History.
Notes
• If you have a long list of calls in the Call History, you can tap one of the buttons at the bottom of the Call
History screen to filter the list according to the type of call that you want to display.
To make a call from Call History:
ᮣ Tap a phone number you want to call.
To delete all Call History entries:
ᮣ Tap Menu > Clear Call Logs.
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
63
Speed Dial
Use Speed Dial to call frequently-used numbers with a single tap. For example, if you assign a contact to the
location 2 in Speed Dial, you can tap and hold
on the Phone keypad to dial the contact’s number.
To create a Speed Dial entry:
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Speed Dial.
2. Tap Menu > New.
3. Tap a contact, and then select the phone number of the contact that you want assigned to the speed
dial key.
4. In Location, select an available key to use as the speed dial key.
5. Tap ok.
• Number
and
keys are reserved and cannot be assigned as speed dial keys. The number
Notes
key is reserved for voicemail. You can set any number between “2” and “99” as a speed dial key.
• When you assign a new phone number in an occupied speed dial key, the new phone number will replace
the existing one.
• To delete a speed dial entry, in the Speed Dial list, tap and hold the desired entry, and then tap Delete.
To make a call using Speed Dial:
If you have assigned a speed dial key to a contact, do the following to dial the contact’s number:
ᮣ Tap and hold the assigned key, if it is a single-digit speed dial number.
– or –
To dial a two-digit speed dial number, tap the first number key first, and then tap and hold the second
number key.
Straight Talk
Your device features Straight Talk™, a technology that integrates messaging, voice call, and three-way
calling. With a dual microphone and speaker that enhance voice quality and reduce noise, Straight Talk
turns your device into a conference room speakerphone system.
Making a Call from a Text Message
While you are viewing a text message on the Messages tab or in the Inbox, you can directly call the sender
of the message.
1. While viewing the text message, press the Talk key.
2. The Phone screen then opens, with the sender’s phone number automatically filled in and ready to be
dialed. To place the call, tap the Talk button on the Phone screen or press the Talk key again.
Tapping a phone number that is displayed in the body of the text message also allows you to call that
number.
For more information about viewing text messages on the Messages tab, see “Messages” on page 45. For
more information about working with text messages, see “Text Messaging (SMS)” on page 131.
64
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
Making a Call from an Email Message
While viewing a received email message, you can directly place a call to the sender of the message.
Tapping a phone number that is displayed in the body of the email message also allows you to call that
number.
To receive email, set up your email account first on your device. See “Email Messaging” on page 158 for
instructions.
Note
From the TouchFLO 3D Mail Tab or Inbox
ᮣ When you are browsing email messages on the Mail tab or in the Inbox, select a received email and then
press the Talk key. To call the sender, follow the same steps in “Making a Call from a Text Message” on
information about working with email messages, see “Email Messaging” on page 158.
From an Open Email
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab.
2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to browse through received messages. Tap an email message
to open it.
3. To place a call, you can do the following:
Ⅲ If the sender is a contact that is stored with a phone number on your device, tap the Talk button (
that is displayed to the right of the sender name to directly dial the sender’s phone number.
)
Talk
button
Ⅲ To call the phone number that is contained in the email message, tap that phone number.
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
65
4. While the call is in progress, you can view the email message directly on the Phone screen. An email
indicator is shown on the Keypad button ( ). Tap this button to view the message.
Making a Call from a Meeting Request or Reminder
When you receive a calendar reminder or meeting request email that contains a phone number, you can tap
the number to directly place the call.
For example, if you are traveling and need to join a conference bridge call back in the home office, rest
assured that you can join the call without delay. Appointment reminders you receive on your device will
conveniently display the phone number and PIN, ready for you to dial.
If you made a call from a meeting request email, you can view the meeting details in the email directly on the
Phone screen while the call is in progress. Tap the Keypad button (
) to view the meeting details.
66
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
Turning On the Speakerphone During a Call
While a call or three-way call is in progress, you can turn on the speakerphone by simply placing your
device face down.
Dual speaker
Mute key
Dual microphone
Your device provides crystal-clear sound quality and voice reception during three-way calls. When the
speakerphone is on, your device also enables the dual microphone to enhance your voice quality and
reduce noise.
When you need to temporarily mute the dual microphone so that the three-way call participants will not hear
you, press the Mute button. Press it again to unmute.
For instructions on how to make a three-way call, see “Making a Three-Way Call” on page 137 .
Note
Turning the Phone On and Off
In many countries, you are required by law to turn off the phone while on board an aircraft.
Enabling or Disabling the Phone
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications to open the Comm Manager.
2. Tap the OFF/ON slider at the right side of the Phone option to enable or disable the phone function.
When enabled, the ON indicator is activated.
Enabling or Disabling Airplane Mode
Another way to turn off the phone function is to switch your device to Airplane Mode.
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications to open the Comm Manager.
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap Airplane Mode to enable or disable Airplane Mode. When enabled,
the ON indicator is activated.
When you enable Airplane Mode, all wireless radios on your device are turned off, including the phone
function, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi. When you disable Airplane Mode, the phone function is turned back on and
the previous states of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are restored.
When you return from an international trip and you disable Airplane Mode after landing in the United States, your
device will first search for GSM networks if your device has been set to Global mode and was connected to a
GSM network before. A “No Service” status message may first appear on your device. Please wait for your device
to scan for CDMA service and connect to the Nationwide Sprint Network or a CDMA roaming network.
Note
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
67
Phone Services
When you are using your device in the United States, you can configure CDMA (domestic) phone services
for your device.
To access and change settings for domestic phone services:
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, tap Phone > CDMA Services tab.
3. Tap the service you want to change, and then tap Get Settings.
4. Tap ok after changing settings.
The following are some of the services that you can configure for your device:
Service
Usage
Location Setting
Allows the network to detect your current location using your device’s built-in
GPS chip. This is especially useful in emergencies.
TTY Mode
Allows the use of a TTY (teletypewriter) device with the phone for users who are
visually or hearing impaired. Choose one of the following modes, depending on
the operation mode that is supported by the TTY device:
ⅷ Full mode: Send and receive text during an ongoing call.
ⅷ VCO mode: Voice Carry Over mode, which allows users to send voice and
receive text during an ongoing call.
ⅷ HCO mode: Hearing Carry Over mode, which allows users to send text and
receive voice during an ongoing call.
ⅷ Off: Disable TTY mode, and send and receive voice during an ongoing call.
Roaming
To better control roaming costs, you can set your device to roam only on certain
networks. The Data Roam Guard also helps you to manage your roaming costs.
For more information about roaming, see “Roaming” on page 137.
Time Synchronization Allows the system time on your device to be synchronized with the time
information of the mobile phone network.
Voicemail
Allows you to delete voicemail messages and clear the voicemail icon if it
appears on the screen.
Roaming Alert
DDTM Mode
Enables sound alerts on your device so that you can be notified when your
device enters or goes out of the network coverage area.
By default, voice calls take precedence over data. If, for instance, you are
browsing the Web or streaming media, the data connection may be interrupted
when you have an incoming call. To avoid interrupting the data connection, you
can turn on DDTM Mode so that voice calls can be automatically sent to
voicemail and the data connection will not be interrupted.
For more information about customizing settings of phone services, see Help on your device.
68
Section 2D. Using Phone Features
Section 2E
Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
You can take information from your computer wherever you go by synchronizing them to your device . This section
explains how to connect your device to the computer and synchronize your data.
About Synchronization
The following types of information can be synchronized between your computer and your device:
ⅷ Microsoft® Office Outlook® information, which includes Office Outlook email messages, contacts, calendar,
tasks, and notes
ⅷ Notes, which are created using Microsoft® Office OneNote® 2007
ⅷ Media, such as pictures, music, and video
ⅷ Favorites, which are the bookmarked links to your favorite websites
ⅷ Files, such as documents and other files
Before you can synchronize, you first need to install and set up the synchronization software on your
“Setting Up ActiveSync on Windows XP” in this section.
Ways to Synchronize
After you have installed the synchronization software on your computer, connect and synchronize your
device with your computer by:
ⅷ Using the supplied USB sync cable.
Upon connecting the sync cable to your device and your computer, the synchronization process
automatically starts.
ⅷ Using Bluetooth.
You must first set up a Bluetooth partnership between your device and your computer before you can
synchronize information between them using Bluetooth. For more information about setting up a
through Bluetooth, see “Synchronizing via Bluetooth.”
Try to synchronize regularly in order to keep information up-to-date in both your device and your computer.
You can also synchronize Outlook email messages, contacts, calendar, and tasks on your device with the
Exchange Server at your workplace. For more information about setting up your device to synchronize with the
Note
Section 2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
69
Setting Up Windows Mobile Device Center on Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows Mobile® Device Center is the replacement for Microsoft® ActiveSync® on Windows Vista®.
Some versions of Windows Vista come with Windows Mobile Device Center already installed. If Windows Mobile
Device Center is not available in your Windows Vista installation, you can install it from the Getting Started CD that
came with your device.
Note
Setting Up Synchronization in Windows Mobile Device Center
When you connect your device to your computer and start Windows Mobile Device Center for the first time,
you are asked to create a Windows Mobile partnership with your device. To create a partnership:
1. Connect your device to your computer. Windows Mobile Device Center configures itself, and then opens.
2. On the license agreement screen, click Accept.
3. On the Windows Mobile Device Center’s Home screen, click Set up your device.
Choose Connect without setting up your device if you only want to transfer media files, check for updates,
and explore your device but not synchronize Outlook information.
Note
4. Select the items you want to synchronize, and then click Next.
5. Enter a device name, and then click Set Up.
When you finish the setup wizard, Windows Mobile Device Center synchronizes your device automatically.
Outlook email messages and other information appear on your device after synchronization.
70
Section 2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
Using Windows Mobile Device Center
To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center on your
Windows Vista computer.
Within Windows Mobile Device Center, you can do the following:
ⅷ Click Mobile Device Settings to change synchronization settings.
ⅷ Click Pictures, Music and Video > __ new pictures/video clips are available for import, and a wizard will guide you
through tagging and transferring photos from your device to the Photo Gallery on your computer.
ⅷ Click Pictures, Music and Video > Add media to your device from Windows Media Player to synchronize music and
video files using Windows Media Player. For more information, see “Using Windows Media Player Mobile”
ⅷ Click File Management > Browse the contents of your device to view documents and files on your device.
See Windows Mobile Device Center Help for more information.
Note
Setting Up ActiveSync on Windows XP
On a Windows® XP computer, you need to use Microsoft ActiveSync® 4.5 or later. If you do not have this
software on your computer, you can install it from the Getting Started CD that came with your device.
Setting Up Synchronization in ActiveSync
1. Connect your device to your computer. The Synchronization Setup Wizard automatically starts and
guides you to create a synchronization partnership. Click Next to proceed.
2. To synchronize your device with your computer, clear the Synchronize directly with a server running Microsoft
Exchange check box, and then click Next.
3. Select the information types that you want to synchronize, and then click Next.
4. Select or clear the Allow wireless data connections check box according to your preference.
5. Click Finish.
When you finish the wizard, ActiveSync synchronizes your device automatically. Notice that Outlook email
messages and other information appear on your device after synchronization.
Section 2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
71
Synchronizing With Your Computer
Connect and synchronize your device with your computer using the USB cable or Bluetooth connection.
Starting and Stopping Synchronization
You can manually synchronize from either your device or your computer.
From your Device
ᮣ From the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then touch Sync Data.
– or –
Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync, and then tap Sync. To end synchronization before it completes, tap Stop.
To delete a partnership with one computer completely, disconnect your device from that computer. In ActiveSync
on your device, tap Menu > Options..., tap the computer name, and then tap Delete.
Tip
From Windows Mobile Device Center
1. Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center.
2. Click
at the lower left of the Windows Mobile Device Center. To end synchronization before it
completes, click
.
From ActiveSync on Your Computer
When you connect your device to your computer, ActiveSync automatically opens on your computer and
synchronizes.
ⅷ To manually start synchronization, click
.
ⅷ To end synchronization before it completes, click
.
Specifying What Information Is Synchronized
You can change the information types and the amount of information to synchronize for each type on either
your device or your computer. Follow the steps below to change synchronization settings on your device.
Before changing synchronization settings on your device, disconnect it from your computer.
Note
1. In ActiveSync on your device, tap Menu > Options.
2. Select the check box for any items you want to synchronize. If you cannot select a check box, you might
have to clear the check box for the same information type elsewhere in the list.
3. To change synchronization settings for an information type (for example, E-Mail), select it, and tap Settings.
You can then set the download size limit, specify the time period of information to download, and more.
• Some information types such as Favorites, Files, and Media cannot be selected in ActiveSync Options on your
device. You can select or clear these items only from your computer’s Windows Mobile Device Center or
ActiveSync.
Notes
• A computer can have sync partnerships with many different Windows Mobile powered devices, but a device
can have sync partnerships with at most two computers. To ensure that your device will synchronize properly
with both computers, set up the second computer using the same synchronization settings you used on the
first computer.
• Outlook email messages can be synchronized with only one computer.
72
Section 2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
Troubleshooting Sync Connection Problems
In some cases, when the computer connects to the Internet or a local network, it may disconnect the
connection with your device in favor of the Internet or network connection.
If this happens, tap Start > Settings > All Settings. Tap Connections tab > USB to PC, and then clear the Enable
faster data synchronization check box. This makes your computer use a serial USB connection with your
device.
Synchronizing via Bluetooth
You can connect and synchronize your device with the computer using Bluetooth.
To connect and synchronize your device with a computer via Bluetooth, your computer must have a built-in
Bluetooth or installed with a Bluetooth adapter or dongle.
Note
1. Set up Windows Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync on your computer to synchronize through
Bluetooth. See the program’s Help for instructions.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth on both your device and the computer are turned on and set to visible mode.
See “Using Bluetooth” on page 93 for details.
If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, you must first complete the
Bluetooth wizard on your device and set up a Bluetooth partnership between your device and the
computer. For more information about creating a Bluetooth partnership, see “Bluetooth Partnerships” on
3. On your device, tap Start > ActiveSync.
4. Tap Menu > Connect via Bluetooth > Add a device.
5. Tap the name of your computer, select Bluetooth Serial Port, and then tap Continue.
To conserve battery power, turn off Bluetooth when not in use.
Note
Synchronizing Music and Video
If you want to carry your music or other digital media along with you while you travel, set up Windows Media®
Player on your computer to synchronize music and video with your device.
Other than selecting the Media information type to be synchronized, all media synchronization settings must
be set in Windows Media Player. Before media can be synchronized, you must do the following:
ⅷ Install Windows Media Player Version 11 on your computer. (Windows Media Player 11 works only with
Windows XP or later versions).
ⅷ Connect your device to the computer with a USB cable. If your device is currently connected using
Bluetooth, you must end that connection before media can be synchronized.
ⅷ Set up a sync partnership between your device and your computer’s Windows Media Player.
For more information about using Windows Media Player Mobile, see “Using Windows Media Player Mobile”
Section 2E. Synchronizing Information With Your Computer
73
Section 2F
Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
Your device is equipped with several personal information management features that help you manage your busy lifestyle.
Document viewers, voice recognition and recording programs, a business card reader, and otheruseful tools
are also available. This section shows you how to use these features and tools.
Contacts
Adding New Contacts
You can use the Windows Mobile Contacts program to store and manage the contact information of the
people and businesses you communicate with. You can add the following types of contacts to your device:
ⅷ Outlook contacts. Contacts that are stored on your device, which can be created on your device or
synchronized with your computer or the Exchange Server.
ⅷ Windows Live™ contacts. Contacts that you communicate with using Windows Live™ Messenger or MSN.
• You can also add contacts to your device through the All tab of the All Contacts screen which is accessed
Notes
• You can add Windows Live™ contacts only after setting up Windows Live™ on your device. See “Adding
To open the Contacts screen:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts.
To add a contact on your device:
1. Open the Contacts screen.
2. Tap New, select Outlook Contact, and enter the contact information.
3. In the File as field, choose how you want the contact name to appear in the contact list.
4. To add a photo of the contact, tap Select a picture, and then select the picture file or tap Camera to take a
photo of the contact.
74
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
5. To assign a ring tone to the contact, tap the Ring tone field, scroll through the list of tones, and then select
a desired tone.
6. When finished, tap ok.
• If a person who is not in your list of contacts called you and you want to save that person’s phone number,
you can tap Yes, Create new contact on the pop-up window that appears after the call is ended.
Tips
• To save a phone number that is contained in a message, open the message, tap the underlined phone
number, and then tap Save To Contacts.
• To edit contact information, tap the contact name on the Contacts screen and then tap Menu > Edit.
Managing Contacts
To group similar contacts:
For easier management, you can group similar contacts by assigning them to categories.
1. Create a new Outlook contact or edit an existing Outlook contact.
2. Tap Categories.
3. Select a preset category such as Business or Personal, or tap New to create your own category.
4. When finished, tap ok.
To find a contact on your device:
There are several ways to find a contact when your contact list is long:
ⅷ Begin entering a contact name in the provided text box until the contact you want is displayed.
ⅷ On the Quick Scroll bar on the right of the Contacts screen, scroll to or tap a letter to go directly to the part
of the contacts list where contact names start with that letter.
Quick Scroll
bar
You can disable the Quick Scroll bar by tapping Menu > Options... and selecting the Show alphabetical
index check box. This will show the alphabetical index at the top of the Contacts list.
Note
ⅷ Filter the list by categories. In the contact list, tap Menu > Filter, and then tap a category you’ve assigned to
a contact. To show all contacts again, select Menu > Filter > All Contacts.
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
75
To send contact information via Bluetooth:
You can quickly send contact information to another mobile phone or device through Bluetooth.
1. Tap and hold a contact on the Contacts screen.
2. Tap Send via Bluetooth, and then select a device where to send the contact to.
Before sending, make sure Bluetooth is turned on and set to visible mode on your device and the target mobile
device. You can also send contact information to your computer. See “Sending and Receiving Information Using
Bluetooth” on page 95 for details.
Note
Calendar
You can use the Windows Mobile Calendar program to create appointments, including meetings and other
events, as well as synchronize Calendar appointments between your device and computer.
You can also create appointments through the Calendar tab of the TouchFLO 3D Home screen. See “Calendar”
on page 46 for details.
Note
To open the Calendar screen:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > Calendar.
Creating Appointments
To schedule an appointment:
1. Open the Calendar screen and then tap Menu > New Appointment.
2. Enter a name for the appointment in the Subject field.
3. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If it is a special occasion such as a birthday or an all-day event, set the All Day option to Yes.
Ⅲ If there is a time frame for the appointment, set the start and end dates and times.
4. Specify the type of category for your appointment, so that it can be grouped with other related
appointments. Tap Categories, and then select a preset category (Business, Holiday, Personal, or
Seasonal), or tap New to create your own category.
5. When finished, tap ok to return to the calendar.
• All-day events do not occupy blocks of time; instead, they appear in banners at the top of the calendar.
Notes
• To have the time entered automatically, first, tap Day on the lower-left side of the screen to switch to Day view.
Next, tap and hold on the start time, drag your finger down to select a time slot for the new appointment, and
then tap Menu > New Appointment.
• To remove an appointment, tap Menu > Delete Appointment.
To set the reminder time for new appointments:
By default, Calendar has been set to display a reminder alert when you have new upcoming appointments.
You can change the reminder time.
1. On the Calendar screen, tap Menu > Tools > Options... > Appointments tab.
2. Make sure the Set reminders for new items check box is selected.
3. Set the time when you want the reminder to alert you, and then tap ok to return to the Calendar screen.
76
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
The Calendar Screen
By default, Calendar displays appointments in Agenda view. You can also look at your appointments in Day,
Week, Month, and Year views.
1
2
4
3
Agenda view
1. The highlighted hours indicate the time of your appointments.
2. Tap an appointment to view details about the appointment.
3. Tap the lower-left side of the screen to change the calendar view to one of the following: Day, Week, Month,
Year, or Agenda.
4. The red box and red arrows indicate there are conflicting appointments.
Viewing Appointments
ⅷ To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the appointment.
ⅷ To view appointments by category, tap Menu > Filter, and then select the desired category.
ⅷ To change the default view that Calendar uses to display appointments, tap Menu > Tools > Options... >
General tab. Tap the Start in box, and then choose the calendar view.
ⅷ When in Month view, you will see the following indicators:
Morning appointment
Afternoon or evening appointment
Both morning and afternoon or evening appointments
All-day event
Sending Appointments
Sending a Meeting Request
Use Calendar to schedule meetings via email with contacts who use Outlook or Outlook Mobile.
1. Open the Calendar screen, and then create an appointment or tap Menu > Edit to open an appointment.
2. Tap Attendees, and then tap Add Required Attendee or Add Optional Attendee and add the contacts whom you
want to invite.
You can specify whether an attendee is required or optional only if your device is connected to a Microsoft
Exchange 2007 server. Otherwise, all attendees are designated as required. For more information, see
Note
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
77
3. When you have finished adding attendees, tap Done.
4. Tap ok to send.
• To choose the email account to use for sending meeting requests, tap Menu > Tools > Options... >
Appointments tab. Tap the Send meeting requests via box and choose to send via your Outlook Email,
Internet email (POP3/IMAP4), or Windows Live™ account.
Notes
• If you’re sending the meeting request using your Outlook Email account, it will be sent to the attendees the
next time you synchronize your device with your computer or Exchange Server.
• When attendees accept your meeting request, the meeting is automatically added to their schedules. When
their response is sent back to you, your calendar is updated as well.
Notes
Using Notes, you can create handwritten and typed notes, record voice notes in WAV format, convert
handwritten notes to text for easy readability, and more.
To create a note:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Notes. In the note list, tap New.
2. Use the sliding QWERTY keyboard or choose an onscreen keyboard to enter your text.
For more information about using the sliding QWERTY keyboard or onscreen keyboard, see “Entering Text” on
Tip
3. When finished, tap ok to save and return to the note list.
• To select handwritten text, tap and hold next to the writing. As soon as dots appear, and before they form a
complete circle, quickly drag across the writing.
Notes
• If a letter crosses three ruled lines, it is treated as a drawing rather than text.
To draw in a note:
1. Create or open a note file.
2. Use the stylus to draw on the screen. A selection box then appears around your drawing.
3. Tap ok to save.
To select a drawing (for example, to copy or delete it), tap and hold the drawing briefly. When you lift the stylus, the
drawing is selected.
Note
To record a voice note:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Notes.
2. If you do not see the Recording toolbar, tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar.
To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list. You can also create or open a note first, and
then add a recording to a note.
3. Tap the Record icon (
) to begin recording your voice. Tap the Stop icon (
) to stop recording.
To select the voice recording format, return to the note list and then tap Menu > Options... > Global Input Options
link (at the bottom of the Options screen). On the Input screen, tap the Options tab and choose the desired format
from the Voice recording format list.
Tip
78
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
Tasks
Use Tasks to keep track of things you need to do. A task can occur once or repeatedly (recurring).
Your tasks are displayed in a task list. Overdue tasks are displayed in red. A reminder will be displayed when
you have new tasks to be completed.
To create a task:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Tasks.
2. Tap Menu > New Task, enter a subject for the task, and fill in information such as start and due dates,
priority, and so on.
3. Specify the type of category for your task, so that it can be grouped with other related tasks. Tap
Categories, and then select a preset category (Business, Holiday, Personal, or Seasonal), or tap New to
create your own category.
4. When finished, tap ok.
To change the priority of a task:
Before you can sort tasks by priority, you need to specify a priority level for each task.
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Tasks.
2. Tap the task you want to change the priority for.
3. Tap Edit, and tap a priority level in the Priority box.
4. Tap ok to return to the task list.
All new tasks are assigned a Normal priority by default.
Note
To show start and due dates in the task list:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Tasks, and then tap Menu > Options.
2. Select the Show start and due dates check box, and then tap ok.
Calculator
Calculator features basic calculation functions, and also works as an advanced scientific calculator.
Basic Calculator
Use the Simple Calculator to do basic arithmetic such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division. You can also work with numbers you store in the
calculator memory.
To use the Basic Calculator:
1. Tap Start > Calculator.
2. Operate the calculator the same as you would a handheld calculator by
touching the onscreen keys to enter numbers, clear the entered number, and
perform calculations.
3. You can also tap the respective buttons on the left side of the screen to add
values to the calculator memory, display the stored number from the calculator
memory, or clear the calculator memory.
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
79
• A maximum of 9 digits can be entered for each number.
Notes
• Tap Copy at the lower-left side of the screen to copy the displayed value so that you can paste it to another
program that has a paste function, such as Notes.
• The Basic Calculator can only be used when the screen display is in portrait mode.
Scientific Calculator
Use the Scientific Calculator to perform more complex calculations such as square roots, logarithmic and
trigonometric functions, percentages, and more.
To display the Scientific Calculator:
1. Tap Start > Calculator.
2. Slide open the QWERTY keyboard to display the Scientific Calculator.
To use the Scientific Calculator:
6 5
1
2
3
4
1. Tap to toggle between degrees or radian measurement.
2. Tap to display the second layer of scientific calculation buttons.
3. When you tap one of these function buttons after entering a number, the corresponding operand or
operator is displayed. You can continue to enter numbers, operands and operators to build the formula
expression.
4. Tap to compute and display the calculation result.
5. Tap to clear the calculation result so you can build another equation.
6. Tap to clear the formula expression or calculation result.
80
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
Comm Manager
Comm Manager is a central location where you can easily turn on and off the communication features of your
device such as the phone connection, Wi-Fi, data connection, Bluetooth, and more.
To access the Comm Manager:
Do one of the following:
ᮣ Touch Start > Settings to go directly to the Home screen’s Settings tab, and then touch Communications.
– or –
Touch Start > All Programs > Comm Manager.
– or –
Touch Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab > Comm Manager.
1
12
11
10
9
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1. Switch Airplane Mode on or off. Turning on Airplane Mode turns off the phone connection, Wi-Fi, and
2. Access the phone settings, configure phone services, and more.
163 for details.
6. Open the Connections screen to check or manage data connection settings.
7. Access the phone, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi settings.
8. Connect or disconnect the current data connection.
9. Switch between automatically receiving (as items arrive) or manually retrieving Outlook email messages.
10. Switch Wi-Fi on or off. Tap Settings > Wireless LAN to configure wireless network connection settings. See
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
81
11. Switch Bluetooth on or off. Tap Settings > Bluetooth to configure Bluetooth on your device.
See “Using Bluetooth” on page 93 for details.
12. Switch the phone connection on or off. Tap Settings > Phone to set the ring tone, services, and other phone
Adobe Reader LE
Adobe® Reader® LE is an application for viewing PDF (Portable Document Format) documents on your
device. It supports a subset of the features found in full versions of Adobe Reader.
To open Adobe Reader LE:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > Adobe Reader LE.
To open a PDF file on your device:
ᮣ Open a PDF file in Adobe Reader LE.
– or –
Open File Explorer, find the PDF file, and then tap the file to open it.
To navigate through a PDF document:
You can use the controls in the program and finger gestures to navigate a PDF document.
ⅷ Tap Tools > View > Continuous and then slide your finger up or down the screen to scroll through the pages
in the document.
You can also drag the scroll bars to scroll through the pages.
to zoom in or to zoom out. After zooming in, slide your finger on the screen to pan the current
Tip
ⅷ Tap
page.
ⅷ Tap to return to the previous page; tap to move to the next page. Tap
to jump to the first page; tap
to jump to the last page.
ⅷ Tap Tools > Go To > Page Number to enter a page number that you want to view.
To search for text in the document:
1. Tap Tools > Find > Text or tap
in the toolbar.
2. Type in the text to be searched, and then tap Find. The matched text in the document will be highlighted.
3. To view the next occurrence of the text, tap Tools > Find > Next.
• Adobe Reader LE displays a bookmark pane at the top panel if a PDF file contains bookmarks. Tap the
bookmarks to go to a specific section/page within the file.
Tips
• Adobe Reader LE supports password-protected PDF files with up to 128-bit encryption. When you open a
password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password before opening it.
82
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
Microsoft Office Mobile
Microsoft® Office Mobile consists of the following applications:
ⅷ Microsoft® Office Excel® Mobile lets you create and edit Excel workbooks and templates on your device.
ⅷ Microsoft® Office OneNote® Mobile lets you create notes with text, photos, and voice recordings for
synchronization later with Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 on your computer.
ⅷ Microsoft® Office PowerPoint® Mobile allows you to view (but not create) slide show presentations in *.ppt and
*.pps formats.
ⅷ Microsoft® Office Word Mobile lets you create and edit documents and templates in Word Mobile and save
them as *.doc, *.rtf, *.txt, and *.dot files.
To use Microsoft Office Mobile:
1. Tap Start > Office Mobile.
2. Tap the Office Mobile application that you want to use.
When working with Word Mobile and Excel Mobile files, you can use the Zoom bar on your device for
zooming:
Ⅲ To zoom in, slide your finger from left to right across the Zoom bar.
Ⅲ To zoom out, slide your finger from right to left across the Zoom bar.
Word Mobile and Excel Mobile do not fully support all features of Microsoft Office Word and Microsoft Office
Excel. To see a complete list of features that are not supported in Word Mobile and Excel Mobile, see Help
on your device.
• By default, Word Mobile saves documents in .docx format, while Excel Mobile saves workbooks in .xlsx
format. If you want to open these types of files on a computer that uses Microsoft Office 2000, Office XP, or
Office 2003, you need to download and install the File Format Converter in your computer. You can find this
converter at http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyId=941B3470-3AE9-4AEE-8F43-
C6BB74CD1466&displaylang=en.
Tips
• If you want Word Mobile to save documents in .doc format, tap Menu > Tools > Options... (or Menu >
Options... when no document is opened), and then change the Default template to Word 97-2003
Document (.doc).
• If you want Excel Mobile to save workbooks in a format that is compatible with Microsoft Office 2000, Office
XP, or Office 2003, tap Menu > Options... (with no workbook opened), and then change Template for new
workbook to Blank 97-2003 Workbook.
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
83
JETCET Presentation
If you are away from your office and urgently need to make a presentation, you can use JETCET Presentation to
create a PowerPoint file and present it from your device.
JETCET Presentation also allows you to open and display presentations that were created in Microsoft
PowerPoint 97, PowerPoint 2000, PowerPoint 2002 (XP), or PowerPoint 2003.
Opening JETCET Presentation
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > JETCET Presenter.
Creating a New Presentation
When you open JETCET Presentation, the main screen displays a folder tree. Tap Menu > Cancel first and then
tap Menu > File > New to create a new presentation. You can then enter text, insert graphics, and add more
slides.
To add text to a slide:
1. Tap Edit > Shape > Insert, tap
, and then tap ok.
2. Drag your finger or stylus to draw a text box on the slide.
3. While the text box is selected, set the font type, size and style first and then start entering your text using
the hardware keyboard or onscreen keyboard.
4. While the text box is selected, tap Menu > Paragraph and then set the paragraph alignment, indentation,
and line spacing.
5. To format the text with automated bullets or numbering, tap Menu > Paragraph > Bullets.
6. To modify the properties of the text box, select the text box and then tap Edit > Shape > Modify. You can
change the fill color, add or remove the border, and more. To wrap text inside the text box, tap the Text Box
tab and then select the Word wrap text in AutoShape check box.
To edit text:
1. Select the text box that contains the text you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit > Text > Modify and then change your text. Tap within the text region to place the cursor exactly
where you want to start editing.
To insert an object shape:
1. Tap Edit > Shape > Insert.
2. Tap an object, for example, an arrow, from the Autoshape Objects.
3. Drag on the slide to draw the select shape.
To insert a picture, tap Edit > Shape > Picture.
Tip
To add and edit slides:
1. Tap Edit > Slide > New to add a new slide.
2. To change the background color of a slide, tap Edit > Slide > Background.
3. In Background fill, tap Fill Effects to apply a gradient or tap More Colors to choose a solid color.
4. Tap Apply to change the background color of the current slide, or tap Apply to All to change all slides.
5. To apply a transition effect to the slides, tap Edit > Slide > Transition.
84
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
6. In Effect, select the type of transition effect to use and then select a speed.
7. Choose whether to advance slides on mouse click or automatically. If you select to auto-display slides,
set the time delay.
8. To make the changes to the current slide only, tap Apply. For the changes to affect all slides in the
presentation, tap Apply to All.
To save the presentation:
ᮣ If this is your first time to save your presentation, tap Menu > File > Save As and then enter a new file name.
To save changes made to your presentation, tap Menu > File > Save.
Displaying the Presentation
You can connect your device to a large-screen display such as a television and show your presentation to
an audience as a full-screen slideshow. For more information about connecting your device to a large-
screen display, see “Connecting to an External Display” on page 121
To display the presentation as a slideshow:
1. Tap the PowerPoint file in the folder tree to open the file, or tap File > Open and then tap the
PowerPoint file.
2. Tap Menu > Show > Set Up Show. Select whether to advance slides Manually or Using timings, if present, and
then tap ok.
3. Tap Menu > Show > View Show. The presentation is then displayed in landscape and in full screen.
4. Slide open the hardware keyboard. If you have set up the slideshow to advance manually, press the right
arrow key to advance one slide forward and the left arrow key to go back one slide.
Another way to advance one slide forward is to tap the screen.
You can also tap the arrow watermark at the lower-left corner of the screen to open a selection menu,
and then tap Next or Previous to move between slides.
Arrow watermark
To exit the slideshow:
ᮣ Tap the arrow watermark, tap the down arrow to scroll down the selection menu, and then tap End Show.
For more information about using JETCET Presentation, tap
view the program help.
on the toolbar of JETCET Presentation to
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
85
Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR)
Your device’s built-in ASR lets you make phone calls, open programs, play back music, get calendar
information, and more, just by using your voice. It only responds to a set of predefined commands and does
not allow you to record your own commands.
This section gives a few examples on how to use ASR. For more information, see ASR help on the device.
To access help, tap Start > All Programs > Help tab, tap Help for Added Programs, and then tap Voice Command.
To use ASR:
1. Press and hold the Talk key, and a microphone icon (
) will appear on the title bar.
2. Hold your device a few inches away from your mouth. In a clear voice, say a command.
For example, say “Help” to ask for information about using ASR.
3. The ASR software then asks you a question. Say your answer.
To place a call:
You can call contacts that are stored on your device, dial a phone number, redial, and place a return call.
1. Press and hold the Talk key until the microphone icon (
2. In a clear voice, say one of the following commands:
Ⅲ “Call [contact name]” to call a contact.
) appears on the title bar.
Ⅲ “Dial [number]” to dial a phone number.
Ⅲ “Redial” to repeat the last call made.
Ⅲ “Callback” to return the last call received.
Ⅲ “Call [contact name] at [location]” to call a contact at a specific number.
For example, say:
“Call Ann at mobile”
“Call Ann at home”
“Call Ann at work”
3. The ASR software will then confirm with you the contact or number to call. Say “Yes” or “Correct.”
If the ASR software is wrong about the contact or number to call, say “No” or “Incorrect” to try again.
4. Your device starts to call the contact or number.
To open a program:
1. Press and hold the Talk key until the microphone icon (
) appears on the title bar.
2. In a clear voice, say “Start”, “Open”, or “Show” then the program name.
To request information from your calendar:
1. Press and hold the Talk key until the microphone icon (
) appears on the title bar.
2. In a clear voice, ask for the information you want to retrieve.
For example, say:
“What’s my next appointment?”
“What’s my next meeting?”
“What’s my schedule tomorrow?”
86
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
To request for date and time:
1. Press and hold the Talk key until the microphone icon (
) appears on the title bar.
2. In a clear voice, say “What date is it?” The ASR software then tells you the current date.
3. Press and hold the Talk key again, and then say “What time is it?”
4. The ASR software then tells you the current time.
Voice Recorder
Voice Recorder lets you record your voice and quickly send it as an email attachment, send it in a picture
message, or set the recorded voice as your ring tone.
Voice Recorder saves voice recordings in AMR-NB (Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband) format only. This is a
common speech audio format used in mobile devices.
Note
To record your voice:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Voice Recorder.
2. Hold the device’s microphone close to your mouth.
3. Touch Record or
to start recording. Tap Stop or
to end the recording.
To select or create a folder in which to save voice recordings:
By default, all recordings are saved in the My Voices folder of the device. You can choose another folder or
create a new folder to save your voice recordings.
If a microSD card is installed before you open Voice Recorder, the recordings are saved in the My Voices folder
on the microSD card by default.
Tip
1. Tap the arrow beside the folder name on the upper left side of the screen.
2. In the menu that opens, choose an existing folder or touch Add/Delete to create a new folder.
To play back a voice recording:
ᮣ On the Voice Recorder screen, touch a voice recording to play it.
If you need to adjust the sound volume, press the Volume Up or Volume Down button.
Tip
To set a voice recording as your ring tone:
ᮣ Tap and hold a voice recording, and then tap Set as Ringtone.
To send a voice recording in an email or picture message:
1. Tap and hold a voice recording, and then tap Send.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ To send the voice recording in an email message, select an email account, compose your email
Ⅲ To send the voice recording in a picture message, tap Picture Message, compose your message, and
then tap Send.
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
87
To send a voice recording via Bluetooth:
ᮣ Tap and hold the voice recording you want to send, and then tap Send via Bluetooth. For more information
about Bluetooth, see “Using Bluetooth” on page 93.
To rename or move a recording:
1. Tap and hold the voice recording, and then tap Rename/Move.
To select multiple recordings, tap and drag over the desired recordings or tap Menu > Select All. Notethat
you can move multiple files, but you cannot rename multiple files simultaneously.
Tip
2. In the Name box, enter the new voice recording name.
3. To move the voice recording, select the new destination in the Folder and Location boxes, and then tap ok.
WorldCard Mobile (Business Card Scanner)
WorldCard Mobile uses your device’s built-in camera to scan business cards and import the information into
your Contacts.
To access WorldCard Mobile:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > WorldCard Mobile.
To capture a business card and import the information to Contacts:
1. Tap
on the WorldCard Mobile screen to open the Camera program.
2. Tap the Virtual Camera button (
) to take a photo of the business card, and then tap the Back button
(
). For more information about using the Camera, see “Taking Photos and Videos” on page 98.
Make sure that lighting is adequate and that the entire business card is visible on the Camera screen before
taking a picture.
Tip
3. On the WorldCard Mobile screen, tap Recognize.
• If you want to retake the shot, tap Re-Capture.
Tips
• For better recognition, choose the Language and Region based on the language used in the business
card.
4. The screen will display contact information captured from the business card. Use the onscreen keyboard
to edit the contact information, if needed.
Uncheck the box beside any contact information that you do not want to appear in your Contacts..
Tip
5. Tap Export to transfer the captured data to Contacts.
6. Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts to view the contact.
For more information about using WorldCard Mobile, tap
program help.
on the WorldCard Mobile screen to view the
88
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
JETCET PRINT (Wireless Printing Application)
JETCET PRINT™ lets you print image files or documents from your device directly to a Bluetooth or network
printer. You can also print email messages, email attachments, appointments, contacts, and tasks.
To open JETCET PRINT:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > JETCET PRINT 5.
To set up a printer:
ᮣ On the JETCET PRINT screen, tap the Settings tab, and then tap:
Ⅲ Add Network Printer to set up and connect to a shared network printer.
The device will wait continuously if you have entered an incorrect IP address while setting up a network printer.
Note
– or –
Ⅲ Add Bluetooth Printer to set up and connect to a Bluetooth printer.
To print a document, image, email, or other types of information:
1. On the JETCET PRINT screen, select what you want to print (document, picture, or email/PIM) by tapping
the corresponding tabs on top of the screen.
2. If you want to print a calendar appointment, contact or task, tap , and then select which type of
information you want to print.
3. Tap and hold the file, picture, or item that you want to print, and then tap Print.
4. Select the printer to use and the paper size, and then tap Next.
5. Choose a page layout from the list, and then tap Next to start printing.
You can also print document and image files from File Explorer. To print, use File Explorer to locate the file you
want to print. Tap and hold the file, and then tap Print via JETCET 5... on the pop-up menu.
Tip
For more information about using JETCET PRINT, tap Menu > Help > Contents on the JETCET PRINT screen to
view the program help.
Section 2F. Contacts, Calendar, and Tools
89
Section 2G
microSD Card
Your device lets you insert a microSD™ card to expand the available storage space. This highly secure digital card
enables you to exchange images, music, and other data between SD-compatible devices, and also provides
additional storage space on your device.
Using a microSD Card on Your Device
A microSD card is not included in the box.
Note
Inserting the microSD Card
The microSD card slot is located under the back cover of your device.
2. Insert the microSD card into the slot with the gold contacts facing down (in the same orientation as the
image above the card slot).
3. Replace the back cover.
Removing the microSD card
2. Remove the microSD card by pressing on the exposed edge and releasing. The card should pop out
partway.
90
Section 2G. microSD Card
Managing the microSD Card
Copying Files to the microSD Card
1. Tap Start > File Explorer and navigate to the appropriate folder.
2. Tap and hold the file you want to copy, and then tap Copy.
3. Tap the down arrow (
), and then tap Storage Card in the list.
4. Tap and hold an empty area on the screen and then select Paste on the menu.
You can configure programs such as Word Mobile and Excel Mobile to directly save edited files to the microSD
card. In the program's file list, tap Menu > Options..., and then select Storage Card in the Save to box.
Tip
Encrypting files on the microSD Card
You can set your device to encrypt files as they are saved on the microSD card.
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Encryption.
3. Select the Encrypt files when placed on a storage card check box, and then tap ok.
• Encrypted files can only be read on the device that encrypted them.
Notes
• Encrypted files are opened just like other files, provided you are using the device that encrypted them. There is
no separate step for you to take to read these files.
If Encrypt files when placed on a storage card is enabled, back up all files from the microSD card before
using Clear Storage, hard reset, or updating the ROM system software. Otherwise you will no longer be
able to access the encrypted files on the microSD card. Use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center
to transfer files between your microSD card and computer. After the procedure, copy those files back to
the microSD card.
Important
Checking the Available microSD Card Memory
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Memory > Storage Card tab.
If your device is running low on memory, try the following to free memory on your device:
Ⅲ Close programs that are not in use.
Ⅲ Move files and email attachments to the microSD card.
Ⅲ Delete unnecessary files. Tap Start > File Explorer. Tap and hold the file, and tap Delete.
Ⅲ Delete large files. To find large files on your device, tap Start > All Programs > Search. In the Type list, tap
Larger than 64 KB, and tap Search.
Ⅲ
In Opera Mobile or Internet Explorer Mobile, delete temporary Internet files and clear history information.
Ⅲ Remove programs you no longer use.
Ⅲ Reset your device.
Section 2G. microSD Card
91
Using Your Device as a USB Drive
You can use an installed microSD card as a USB flash drive, allowing you to take pictures, music,
documents, and other files with you on the go.
To use your microSD card as a USB flash drive:
ᮣ Whenever you connect your device to your computer, tthe Connect to PC screen will be displayed. Select
Disk Drive mode on this screen.
– or –
Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab > USB to PC and then select Disk Drive mode.
When Disk Drive mode is enabled while your device is connected to the computer:
Ⅲ You will not be able to use your device to access files from the microSD card or run applications that
are installed on the microSD card.
Ⅲ Your computer will connect only to the device’s microSD card. When you access your device from the
computer, you will only see the contents of the microSD card.
Remember to change back to ActiveSync mode when you need to synchronize data between your device
and your computer.
92
Section 2G. microSD Card
Section 2H
Bluetooth
Your device features built-in Bluetooth technology, allowing you to share information more easily than ever before.
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of
Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers,
printers, and wireless phones. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet.
This section shows you how to use Bluetooth on your device, including turning Bluetooth on and off,
connecting to another Bluetooth device such as a Bluetooth stereo headset, and more.
Using Bluetooth
Bluetooth Modes
Bluetooth on your device has three different modes:
ⅷ On. Bluetooth is turned on. Your device can detect other Bluetooth-enabled devices within range, but
cannot be detected by other Bluetooth-enabled devices.
ⅷ Visible. Bluetooth is turned on, and all other Bluetooth-enabled devices within range can detect your
device.
ⅷ Off. Bluetooth is turned off. In this mode, you can neither send nor receive information using Bluetooth.
• By default, Bluetooth is turned off. If you turn it on and then turn off your device, Bluetooth also turns off. When
you turn on your device again, Bluetooth automatically turns on.
Notes
• Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to conserve battery power, or in places where using a wireless device is
prohibited, such as aboard an aircraft and in hospitals.
Turning Bluetooth On and Making Your Device Visible
The first time you use Bluetooth, follow the steps below to turn Bluetooth on and make your device visible to
other Bluetooth-enabled devices.
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications and then tap Bluetooth.
2. When prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Yes.
3. Tap the Settings tab (
), and then tap Not Discoverable.
4. Tap the drop-down menu and then select Always Visible.
If you select Visible for 60 seconds, Bluetooth visibility will turn off automatically when the time elapses and
your device has not yet connected to another Bluetooth device.
Note
5. Tap Done. The
icon then appears in the title bar to indicate that your device is in visible mode.
To easily switch Bluetooth off or back on, tap Start > Settings > Communications to open the Comm Manager
and then tap Bluetooth’s OFF/ON slider. Your device remembers whether visible mode was previously
enabled or disabled. If you did not disable visible mode, switching Bluetooth on in the Comm Manager also
puts your device in visible mode automatically. For more information about using the Comm Manager, see
Section 2H. Bluetooth
93
Bluetooth Partnerships
A Bluetooth partnership is a relationship that you create between your device and another Bluetooth-
enabled device in order to exchange information in a secure manner.
Creating a Bluetooth Partnership
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications and then tap Bluetooth.
2. On the Settings tab (
), tap Add a device.
3. Tap a Bluetooth device to connect with.
4. Specify a passcode, which can be 1 up to 16 characters, to establish a secure connection, and then
tap OK.
Your device uses Bluetooth 2.1 with Secure Simple Pairing feature. If the other Bluetooth device you are pairing
with also supports the same feature, the passcode will be automatically created and displayed on both devices.
Both you and other party simply need to verify that the passcode is the same and tap Yes to establish the
partnership.
Note
5. After the receiving party accepts the partnership, the Bluetooth device name is shown on the screen,
including all Bluetooth services that you can use with it. Select the check boxes of the Bluetooth services
you want to use, and then tap Done.
6. If you selected to use the Bluetooth Serial Port service of the paired device, select a local serial port to
assign for the paired device, and then tap Continue.
The connected Bluetooth device now appears in the Devices tab (
).
Tap Properties to change the paired device name. Tap Menu > Update to update the list of services that you
can use with the paired device.
Tip
Creating a Bluetooth partnership between two devices is a one-time process. Once a partnership is created,
the devices can recognize the partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode again.
Accepting a Bluetooth Partnership
1. Ensure that Bluetooth is turned on and in visible mode.
2. When prompted, enter or accept the passcode (the same passcode from the device requesting the
partnership) to establish a secure connection.
3. Tap OK. The paired device now appears in the Devices tab (
). You can now exchange information
with the paired device.
To delete a Bluetooth partnership, select the device’s name on the Devices tab, and then tap Menu > Delete.
When prompted to confirm, tap Yes.
Tip
Connecting a Bluetooth Hands-free or Stereo Headset
For hands-free phone conversations, you can use a Bluetooth hands-free headset such as a car kit with your
device. Your device also supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) which allows you to use a
Bluetooth stereo headset for hands-free phone conversations and for listening to stereo music.
To connect a Bluetooth hands-free or stereo headset:
1. Make sure that both your device and the Bluetooth headset are turned on and within range, and that the
headset is visible. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation to find out how to set the headset in visible
mode.
2. Tap Start > Settings > Communications and then tap Bluetooth.
94
Section 2H. Bluetooth
3. On the Settings tab (
), tap Add a device.
4. Select the hands-free or stereo headset device in the list, and then tap Select. Your device will
automatically connect with the Bluetooth headset.
Your device will automatically try one of the preconfigured passcodes (0000, 8888) to pair with the Bluetooth
headset. If this fails, you have to manually enter the passcode delivered with your headset.
Note
5. When connected, the hands-free or stereo headset device is shown on the screen, including the
Bluetooth services (Hands-free and Stereo Audio) that you can use with it. Make sure these services are
selected, and then tap Done.
The paired headset now appears in the Devices tab (
).
The double arrowhead (
) that is displayed to the right of a service indicates that the service is
connected with your headset. If you turn off your headset, the double arrowhead disappears to indicate that
the service has been disconnected. Next time you turn on and use your headset again, you need to
manually reconnect each service. Tap a service and then tap Connect.
Sending and Receiving Information Using Bluetooth
You can send the following types of information from your device to your computer or to another
Bluetooth-enabled device: Outlook email messages, contacts, tasks, notes, calendar items, audio files,
ring tones, Images, and videos.
If your computer does not have built-in Bluetooth capability, you need to connect and use a Bluetooth adapter or
dongle on your computer.
Note
To send information from your device to a computer (Windows Vista or Windows XP SP2 [or higher] only):
1. On your computer, open Bluetooth Devices from the Control Panel, click the Options tab on the Bluetooth
Devices window, and then do the following.
Ⅲ In Windows Vista, select Allow Bluetooth devices to find this computer.
Ⅲ In Windows XP, select Turn discovery on and Allow Bluetooth devices to connect to this computer.
If the Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer was installed using a third-party driver, open the
Bluetooth software that came with the Bluetooth adapter or dongle and enable the adapter or dongle to be
discovered by other devices. Refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s documentation for more information.
Note
2. In the Options tab of Bluetooth Devices on your computer, select Show the Bluetooth icon in the notification area.
Section 2H. Bluetooth
95
3. To enable your computer to receive files or information through Bluetooth, right-click the Bluetooth icon
in the notification area at the bottom right corner of your computer screen and select Receive a File.
Your computer is now ready to receive files or information.
4. Turn on Bluetooth on your device, and make your device visible. For information about this, see “Turning
5. Create a Bluetooth partnership between your device and computer. For instructions, see “Creating a
6. On your device’s Bluetooth screen, tap the Accessories tab (
), and then tap BT Send Object.
or . Select the check boxes of
7. To switch between the types of information that can be sent, tap
items you want to send.
8. Tap Send.
9. Select the Bluetooth device to which you want to send the items, and then tap Select.
10. If you sent Outlook Email messages, calendar items, tasks, or contacts to your computer and they are not
automatically added to Outlook, select File > Import and Export in Outlook to import them.
To send information to a Bluetooth-enabled device such as another Windows Mobile-powered device, follow
steps 4 to 9 in the above procedure.
The default folder on your computer where beamed items are stored may be
C:\Docments and Settings\your_username\My Documents in Windows XP or
C:\Users\your_username\My Documents in Windows Vista.
Tips
To send a file to another Bluetooth-enabled device:
1. Tap Start > File Explorer.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to send.
3. Tap and hold the desired file, and then tap Send via Bluetooth.
4. Tap the name of the Bluetooth device to which you want to send the file.
96
Section 2H. Bluetooth
To receive information from another Bluetooth-enabled device:
1. When you receive information such as calendar items, tasks, or contacts sent from another Bluetooth-
enabled device, tap Accept.
2. After your device has finished saving the information, tap Done.
To change the folder for saving received files:
Files that you receive from another Bluetooth-enabled device are saved in \My Documents on your device.
You can change the destination folder for saving received files:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications and then tap Bluetooth.
2. On the Settings tab (
3. Scroll down and then tap File Transfer.
4. Tap Search ( ).
5. Select the new destination folder, and then tap Select.
), tap Advanced.
To save received files on your storage card when it is inserted on your device, select Save files to storage card
when present. Files will be saved on the root folder of your storage card.
Tip
6. Tap Done.
Printing via Bluetooth
Connect your device to a Bluetooth printer to print your pictures.
Before you start printing, make sure to turn on the Bluetooth printer and turn on Bluetooth on your device. For
Note
To print a picture:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications and then tap Bluetooth.
2. Tap the Accessories tab (
), and then tap Print Images. Your device then searches for pictures that
are stored on your device and storage card.
3. Tap each picture that you want to select for printing. To select all pictures, tap Menu > Select All.
To clear a selected picture, tap that picture again.
Tip
4. After you have finished selecting pictures, tap Next.
5. Select the name of the Bluetooth printer, and then tap Select.
6. Select the Print Layout to use, and then tap Print.
Section 2H. Bluetooth
97
Section 2I
Experiencing Multimedia
Your device’s multimedia features give you the ability to capture full color digital pictures and videos, view your pictures and
videos, and more. This section explains how to use these multimedia features.
Taking Photos and Videos
Use your device’s built-in camera to take photos and record video clips.
To launch the camera:
ᮣ From the Home screen, slide to the Photos and Videos tab, and then tap the camera icon (
).
The screen orientation automatically switches to landscape mode.
You can also tap Start > All Programs > Camera to launch the camera.
Tip
To turn off the camera:
ᮣ Tap
and then tap
on the camera screen.
Capture Modes
The camera on your device allows you to capture pictures and video clips by using various built-in modes
that provide you flexibility in taking your shots.
To change the capture mode:
ᮣ Tap
and then tap the middle icon at the bottom of the screen. (The icon displayed is based on
the current capture mode.)
The Capture Mode menu then opens. Tap the capture mode you want to use.
CurrentCapture
Mode
98
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
You can select from the following capture modes:
Icon
Capture mode
Photo. Captures standard still images.
Video. Captures video clips, with or without accompanying audio.
Panorama. Captures a sequence of still images continuously in one direction, and allows
stitching of all the images to create a panoramic view of a scenery.
MMS Video. Captures video clips suitable for sending via video messaging.
Contacts Picture. Captures a still image and gives you the option to immediately assign it as a
Photo ID for a contact.
Picture Theme. Captures still images and places them within frames.
Supported File Formats
Using the available capture modes, the camera in your device captures files in the following formats:
Capture mode
Format
Photo / Contacts Picture /
Picture Theme / Panorama
JPEG
Video
H.263 (.3gp)
3GPP2 (.3g2)
MPEG-4 (.mp4)
H.264 (.3gp)
MMS Video
H.263 (.3gp)
3GPP2 (.3g2)
MPEG-4 (.mp4)
Zooming
Before capturing a photo or a video clip, you can zoom in or out on your subject.
To zoom in or out, slide your finger up or down on the Zoom bar while holding the device sideways. While
you are sliding your finger on the Zoom bar, the level of zoom is shown on the zoom control bar at the left
side of e screen.
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
99
The camera zoom range for a photo or a video clip depends on the capture mode and resolution. Refer to
the resolution and zoom range table for more information.
Capture mode
Photo
Resolution
Zoom range
1.0x to 1.6x
Normal: 2048 x 1536
Widescreen: 2048 x 1216
3M
2M
1M
L
Normal: 1600 x 1200
Widescreen: 1600 x 960
1.0x to 1.6x
1.0x to 1.6x
1.0x to 1.6x
1.0x to 3.2x
Normal: 1280 x 960
Widescreen: 1280 x 768
Normal: 640 x 480
Widescreen: 640 x 384
Normal: 320 x 240
Widescreen: 320 x 192
M
Video
CIF
M
S
352 x 288
176 x 144
128 x 96
1x and 1.6x
1x and 1.6x
1x and 1.6x
1x and 1.6x
1x and 1.6x
1x and 1.6x
1.0x to 3.2x
1.0x to 3.2x
MMS Video
Panorama
M
S
176 x 144
128 x 96
L
640 x 480
320 x 240
272 x 272
M
M
Contacts Picture
Picture Theme
Determined by the current template
Depends on the size of
the selected template
Using Focus
Use the Auto Focus or Touch Focus function to capture sharp and crisp photos and videos.
Auto Focus
Auto Focus sets the focus on the object at the center of the screen and is available for all capture modes. By
default, touching the Virtual Camera button (
) activates Auto Focus and a flashing white bracket (
)
appears in the center of the screen. When focus is set, the bracket changes to a steady green bracket (
and then the Camera takes the photo or starts to record the video.
),
Touch Focus
Touch Focus allows you to focus on a particular area of the screen. Touch Focus is enabled by default and
is only available when you are using Photo or Contacts Picture mode.
Note
100
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
To use Touch Focus:
1. Set the Camera to Photo or Contacts Picture mode.
2. Touch the area on the screen that you want to focus. The Touch Focus indicator (
) positions itself on
the selected area.
If you tap outside the effective focus area, a white box appears to indicate the area where you can use
Touch Focus.
Note
3. Touch to activate Auto Focus on the selected area and take the photo. See “Auto Focus” on page 100 for
more information.
4. To move the Touch Focus indicator back to the center of the screen, tap
.
Capturing Photo or Recording Video
By default, the Camera automatically takes the shot or starts capturing video after you have set the focus.
ⅷ In Photo or Contacts Picture mode, touch the Virtual Camera button (
focus is set, the Camera automatically takes the shot.
) to activate Auto Focus. When
ⅷ In Video or MMS Video mode, touch the Virtual Camera button (
) to activate Auto Focus. When focus is
set, the Camera automatically starts recording. Touch the Virtual Camera button again to stop recording.
ⅷ In Picture Theme or Panorama mode, touch the Virtual Camera button (
) to activate Auto Focus. When
focus is set, the Camera automatically takes the first shot. Do the same for each shot you need to take.
After capturing a photo or recording video, the Review screen is displayed. Tap one of the following icons at
the bottom of the screen:
Icon
Function
Back. Return to the live camera screen.
View. View the captured image or video in the Album program.
/
Delete. Delete the captured image or video.
Send. Send the captured image via email or picture messaging. You can
also send a captured video via email or video messaging.
Assign to Contact. After capturing in Contacts Picture mode, tap this icon
to assign the photo to a selected contact.
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
101
Onscreen Controls and Indicators
Tap
to display onscreen controls and indicators.
6
1
2 3
4
5
7
8
1. Album. Open the Album program to view your captured photos and video clips. See “Viewing Photos and
5. Remaining information indicator. In Photo, Contacts Picture, Picture Theme, and Panorama modes, this
shows the remaining number of pictures you can take based on the current settings. In Video and MMS
Video modes, this shows the remaining duration that can be recorded. While recording video, this shows
the recorded duration.
6. Show/Hide icon. Show or hide the onscreen controls and indicators.
7. Template Selector icon. In Picture Theme mode, tap to select another frame.
8. Progress indicator. In Picture Theme and Panorama modes, this shows the number of consecutive shots.
102
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
Menu Panel
The Menu panel lets you quickly adjust common camera settings and provides access to more advanced
camera settings. To open the Menu panel, tap
on the Camera screen, and then tap
. To adjust a
setting, repeatedly tap a button, for instance, White Balance, to cycle through the available settings.
The available Menu Panel buttons depend on the selected capture mode.
Note
Icon
Function
Select the white balance setting according to the current lighting condition to capture
colors more accurately.
Open the Brightness bar and adjust the brightness level. Tap outside the Brightness bar
to apply the change.
Set the ISO level manually to 100, 200, 400, or 800, or set it back to AUTO. Higher ISO
numbers are better for taking pictures in low light conditions.
When set to AUTO, the camera automatically adjusts the ISO level up to 400 only.
Set the self-timer to 2 seconds, 10 seconds, or Off when in Photo or Contacts Picture
mode.
Open the advanced camera settings. See “Setting Advanced Options” (below)
for details.
Setting Advanced Options
Tap Advanced on the Menu panel to open the Advanced screen where you can configure settings for your
selected capture mode.
Navigating the Advanced Screen
3
2
1
1. Tap the left and right arrows to go through the different pages of settings.
2. Tap Back to go back to the live camera screen.
3. Tap an item to change the setting.
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
103
Settings on the Advanced Options Screen
ⅷ Resolution. Select the resolution to use. See “Zooming” on page 99, and refer to the resolution and zoom
range table for the available resolutions.
ⅷ Widescreen (Photo mode). When set to On (default), you can use the entire screen as viewfinder. See
“Zooming” on page 99, and refer to the resolution and zoom range table for the available widescreen
resolutions.
ⅷ Touch Focus (Photo and Contacts Picture modes). Enables or disables the Touch Focus function. Touch
ⅷ Review Duration. Set a time length for displaying the captured image or video on the Review screen. Select
No Limit if you do not want to impose a time limit. Select No Review to immediately return to the live camera
screen after capturing and saving.
ⅷ Quality. Select the image quality level for captured photos. Choose from Basic, Normal, Fine, and Super Fine.
ⅷ Capture Format (Video and MMS Video modes). Select the file format for recorded videos.
ⅷ Time Stamp (Photo mode). Include the date and time on captured photos.
ⅷ Storage. Select where to save photos and videos. You can either save the files to the main memory, or to a
storage card if available.
ⅷ Keep Backlight. Turn the backlight on or off. This overrides your device backlight settings while you are
using the camera.
ⅷ Shutter Sound. Choose whether you want the camera to make a shutter sound when you press the Virtual
Camera button.
ⅷ Image Properties. Adjust properties, such as Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Tap a property to adjust.
2. Save the settings.
3. Decrease the value.
4. Reset all properties to default.
5. Increase the value.
6. Close the Image Properties screen without applying and saving the changes.
ⅷ Effect. Choose a special effect such as Grayscale or Sepia to apply to your photos or video clips.
ⅷ Metering Mode. Select a metering mode to allow the camera to measure the amount of light and calculate
the best-fit exposure value before capturing. Choose either Center Area to measure light using the center
area of the subject, or Average to measure light using the area around the subject.
104
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
ⅷ Prefix. The file name of a newly captured photo or video is set to “IMAGE” or “VIDEO” followed by a
sequential number, for example: IMAGE_001.jpg. You can also choose the current date or date and time
as the file name prefix.
You can not change the file name prefix when saving captured photos to a storage card. Captured photos are
named using the convention IMAGnnnn.jpg (where ‘nnnn’ is the counter), and are saved to the \DCIM\100MEDIA
folder on the storage card.
Note
ⅷ Counter. Reset the file numbering back to 1.
ⅷ Flicker Adjustment. When taking indoor shots under fluorescent lighting, keep this setting on Auto or change
it to the proper frequency (50Hz or 60Hz) of the power in your country to reduce flicker (60Hz throughout
the United States).
ⅷ Grid (Photo mode). Show a grid on the screen so you can easily frame and center your subjects.
ⅷ Record with Audio (Video or MMS Video mode). Select On to record videos with audio, or Off to record
videos without audio.
ⅷ Recording Limit (Video mode). Set the maximum duration or file size for recording video.
ⅷ Template (Picture Theme mode). Select a frame.
ⅷ Template Folder (Picture Theme mode). By default, templates are stored in the \My Documents\Templates
folder on the device’s Main Memory. If you transferred some templates to a storage card, set this option to
Main + Card.
ⅷ Show Reminder (Contacts Picture mode). Select On if you want the Camera to prompt you to assign the
captured picture to a contact.
ⅷ Direction (Panorama mode). Choose the direction in which to stitch the photos in a panorama.
ⅷ Stitch Count (Panorama mode). Select the number of shots to take and stitch into a panorama.
Viewing Photos and Videos
Use Album to view photos and videos on your device. Album also offers a host of features that allow you to
play a photo slideshow, share photos and videos, and more.
Launching Album
To open Album:
ᮣ From the Home screen, slide to the Photos and Videos tab and tap Album.
– or –
Tap Start > All Programs > Album.
– or –
On the Camera screen, tap
.
When you open Album from the Camera, the screen orientation of Album is switched to landscape mode.
Note
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
105
The Album Screen
1
2
3
6
5
4
1. Tap the Camera icon when you want to use Camera.
3. Browse through the available photos and videos by sliding your finger upward or downward.
4. Tap Albums to open a selection menu and choose another album to view. The contents of the album are
then displayed on the main Album screen.
5. Tap Menu to open a selection menu and choose whether to play a photo slideshow, delete photos or
video clips from the current album, and more.
6. Tap a video file (files with the
icon) to play back the video file. See “Playing Back Video” on page 108
for details.
Animated GIF and video files will not be played back in a slideshow. See “Viewing a Photo Slideshow” on page
107 for details.
Note
Viewing a Photo
While viewing a photo in full-screen mode, tap the screen to open the onscreen menu.
106
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
Icon
Function
Back. Return to the main Album screen, Photos and Videos tab, or the Camera screen.
Slideshow. Start a photo slideshow.
Send. Send the photo using one of the Messaging accounts.
Menu. Open a menu where you can save the screen image as a photo for a contact,
save the current image as a new file, delete the image, and view file properties
You can delete multiple files at once by selecting Menu > Delete Items on the main Album screen and then
selecting the files to delete.
Tip
To view the next or previous photo in the album:
When you are holding your device upright, view the next or previous image by swiping your finger up or
down the screen.
When you turn your device sideways, view the next or previous photo by swiping your finger left or right
across the screen.
To zoom in or out on an photo:
Double-tap the area on the photo you want to zoom in on. To zoom out, double-tap the screen again.
• Use the Zoom bar to zoom in on the center of the photo. Slide your finger to the right of the Zoom bar to
zoom in. Slide to the left of the Zoom bar to zoom out.
Tips
• When you zoom in on a photo, tap and hold the screen to pan and view other areas of the photo. When you
zoom in on a photo, tap the screen, tap
photo as a new file.
and then select Save Screen Image to save the zoomed in
Viewing a Photo Slideshow
To start a photo slideshow, tap the screen, and then tap
show playback controls.
. While viewing the slideshow, tap the screen to
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
107
Icon
Function
Back. Return to the main Album screen or the Photos and Videos tab.
Previous. Go back to the previous photo.
Play/Pause. Play or pause the slideshow.
Next. Go to the next photo.
Menu. Open a menu where you can change slideshow options, such as set the
transition effect to use, time per slide, and orientation of the images.
If the photos are in your favorite album, you can start the slideshow from the Photos and Videos tab on the Home
screen. On the Photos and Videos tab, tap Slideshow.
Tip
Playing Back Video
While playing back video, tap the screen to show the playback controls.
1
2
7
6
3
4
5
1. Drag on the Slider Bar to go forward or backward in the video.
2. Shows the elapsed time.
3. Tap the Rewind icon to go back to the beginning of the video.
4. Tap the Play/Pause icon to play or pause the video playback.
5. Tap the Stop icon to stop playing the video.
6. Change the video display mode to Fit & Crop (default), Best Fit, or Stretch.
7. Shows the total duration.
If the video is in your favorite album, you can start the video playback from the Photos and Videos tab on the
Home screen. On the Photos and Videos tab, tap Play.
Tip
Closing Album
Close Album by tapping
on the main Album screen. When viewing files in full-screen mode, tap the
screen to show the onscreen menu or playback controls and then tap
screen.
to go back to the main Album
108
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
Using Windows Media Player Mobile
Windows Media® Player Mobile plays digital audio and video files that are stored on your device or on a
network, such as on a website.
To open Windows Media Player Mobile:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > Windows Media.
Windows Media Player Mobile opens and displays the Library screen.
Updating the Library
In most cases, Windows Media Player Mobile automatically updates the library. However, you can manually
update the library to ensure that it contains new files that you recently copied to your device or to the storage
card. Tap Menu > Update Library... to manually update the library list.
Playing Video or Audio Files
1. On the Library screen, tap the Library arrow (near the top of the screen), and then tap the media storage
that you want use, for example, Storage Card.
2. Select a category (for example, My Music or My Playlists).
3. Tap and hold the item that you want to play (such as a song, album, or artist name), and then tap Play.
The playback screen opens and plays the audio or video file.
Playback Screen
9
1
2
3
8
7
4
6
5
1. Drag on the Slider Bar to jump to any part of the video or audio.
2. Tap the Full Screen icon to play video in full-screen mode.
3. Tap the Internet icon to launch the Web browser and go to the WindowsMedia.com website.
4. Tap the Previous icon to skip to the beginning of the current file or to the previous file.
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
109
5. Tap the Play/Pause icon to play or pause the video/audio.
6. Tap the Next icon to skip to the next file.
7. Tap the Minus icon to decrease volume.
8. Tap the Plus icon to increase the volume
9. Tap the Sound icon to mute or unmute sound.
• To play a media file that is stored on your device but is not in a library, on the Library screen, tap Menu > Open
File. Tap and hold the item that you want to play (such as a file or a folder), and then tap Play.
Tips
• To play a media file from the Internet or a network server, tap Menu > Library then tap Menu > Open URL.
Synchronizing Video and Audio Files
Use the latest version of Windows Media Player on your computer to synchronize digital media files from
your computer to your device. This ensures that protected files and album art (for skins) are copied to your
device correctly.
Synchronizing Content to Your Device Automatically
1. On your computer, open Windows Media Player, and then connect your device to your computer.
2. In the Device Setup Wizard, select Yes, search my computer now.
If you have previously opened Windows Media Player and searched for media on your computer, you will not
be prompted to search your computer.
Note
3. On the Device Setup dialog box, enter a name for your device and click Finish. Windows Media starts
synchronizing the music files in the computer with the device.
4. Click Stop Sync and then on the left panel of Windows Media Player, right-click the name of your device
and click Set Up Sync.
5. Select the playlist(s) that you want to sync between your computer and device, and then click Add.
On the Device Setup dialog box, make sure that the Sync this device automatically check box is selected.
Note
6. Click Finish.
The files will begin synchronizing to your device. The next time you connect your device to your computer
while Windows Media Player is running, synchronization will start automatically.
Synchronizing Content Manually to Your Device
1. If you have not set up media synchronization between your device and computer, follow steps 1 to 3 in
“Synchronizing Content to Your Device Automatically.”
2. Click the Sync tab on the Windows Media Player of your computer. Select a Playlist or a Library on the left
panel of the Windows Media Player.
3. From the Content List, drag the media files that you want to sync to your device and drop them to the
Sync List.
110
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
1
2
3
Playlists and Library List
Content List
1
2
3
Sync List
4. Click Start Sync to start synchronizing the selected files to your device.
• Use Windows Media Player 11 or higher on your computer to synchronize media files to your device.
Notes
• Audio files copy faster if Windows Media Player is configured to automatically set the quality level for audio
files copied to your device. For more information, see the Windows Media Player Help.
Playlists
In Windows Media Player Mobile, you can create a new playlist by saving the current Now Playing playlist
and giving it a new name.
To save a new playlist:
1. If you are not on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library.
2. Tap to select a category (for example, My Music or My Playlists).
3. Select a media file that you want, and then tap Menu > Queue Up. This adds the file to the Now Playing list.
Repeat this step until you have added all desired media files to the Now Playing list.
You cannot select multiple files at the same time.
Note
4. After adding the media files, tap Menu > Now Playing.
5. On the Now Playing screen, tap Menu > Save Playlist.
6. Enter the playlist name, and then tap Done.
7. To play back the playlist you created, tap My Playlists in the Library, select your playlist, and then tap Play.
Troubleshooting
If you encounter a problem while using the Windows Media Player Mobile, see the Troubleshooting Windows
Media Player Mobile page at the Microsoft website: (http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/help/more/
windows-media-player.mspx).
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
111
Using Audio Booster
Audio Booster optimizes sound for a better listening experience. It provides preset moods, such as hip-hop,
jazz, and rock, and several enhancement presets that suit different types of music.
To open and use Audio Booster, you need to connect a headset to your device.
Note
To open Audio Booster:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > Audio Booster.
1
5
4
3
2
Control
Use
Select the check box to enable or disable the equalizer.
Tap to apply the modified settings.
1 On
2 Done
3 Menu
ⅷ Tap Menu > Cancel to exit Audio Booster without applying the modified settings:
ⅷ Tap Menu > Save as Preset orDelete Preset to save or delete preset equalizer settings.
Drag the sliders to adjust the frequency.
4 Frequency
Band
5 Equalizer
Presets
Tap to choose the Equalizer preset to use.
To use an Equalizer preset:
ᮣ Tap the list box and then select a preset.
To create a custom equalizer preset:
1. Adjust the frequency bands by dragging the equalizer controls. The selected values are indicated on top
of the sliders.
2. Save equalizer settings as a preset by tapping Menu > Save as Preset.
3. Enter a preset name and then tap Done. The preset you created will be added to the list box.
To delete a custom equalizer preset, select it on the preset list box and then tap Menu > Delete Preset. You
cannot delete pre-installed equalizer presets.
Note
112
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
Using MP3 Trimmer
Use MP3 Trimmer to trim MP3 files. You can choose to save a trimmed file as a new file or set it as a ring tone.
1
2
3
6
4
5
1. Shows the title of the MP3 file.
2. Shows the duration of the trimmed portion.
3. Shows the elapsed playback time.
4. Tap Play to start playback, or tap Stop to end the playback.
5. For more precise trimming, you can also tap the Start Point and End Point controls to step backward and
forward in one-second increments.
6. The two arrows show the “mark in” and “mark out” points in the music. Use them to mark the part of the
music that will be used as the new file or ring tone. Drag the left arrow to mark the start time (Start Point),
and then drag the right arrow to mark the end time (End Point).
To trim the MP3 file:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > MP3 Trimmer.
2. Tap Open to find an MP3 file.
3. On the MP3 Trimmer screen, drag the two arrows to adjust the mark in and mark out points.
Ⅲ After you set the mark in point, the song will play back starting from the mark in point.
Ⅲ After you set the mark out point, the song will play back starting from five seconds before the mark out
point.
4. Tap Play to play back the trimmed song.
5. Tap Menu and select to whether set the file as the default ring tone, save the file to the ring tone folder, or
save it using another file name.
If you only want to save the song to the ring tone folder for future use, tap Menu > Save to ring tone folder. Later
on, you can tap Start > Settings > Sound and then tap Ringtone to set it as your ring tone.
Tip
Section 2I. Experiencing Multimedia
113
Section 2J
Managing Your Device
You can customize your device to sound, look, and operate just the way you want it to. This section describes how to
customize your device to best suit your needs.
Copying and Managing Files
You can copy files between your device and computer, or copy files to the microSD card of your device. You
can also efficiently manage your files and folders using File Explorer.
To copy files using Windows Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync:
1. Connect your device to the computer.
2. Click File Management > Browse the contents of your device in Windows Mobile Device Center on your
computer, or click Explore in ActiveSync on your computer. This opens Windows Explorer on your
computer and displays the contents of your device.
3. To copy a file from your device to your computer, browse the contents of your device, right-click the file
you want to copy, and then click Copy.
Right-click a folder on your computer, and then click Paste.
4. To copy a file from your computer to your device, browse the folders on your computer, right-click the file
you want to copy, and then click Copy.
Right-click a folder on your device, and then click Paste.
To manage files on your device using File Explorer:
File Explorer lets you browse and manage the contents of your device. The root folder on the device is named
My Device, and contains the following folders: My Documents, Program Files, Windows, and more.
1. Tap Start > File Explorer and then tap a folder or file to open it.
2. To return to an upper level folder, tap Up.
3. To quickly delete, rename, or copy a file, tap and hold the file, and then choose the desired operation on
the shortcut menu. To copy or delete multiple files, tap and drag over the desired files to select, tap and
hold the selection, and then choose the desired operation on the shortcut menu.
114
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
Settings on Your Device
You can adjust the device settings to suit the way you work. To access all available settings, tap Start >
Settings > All Settings.
Personal Tab
Icon
Description
Buttons Assign a program or function to a hardware button, or set the function you want to
execute (for instance, lock the device) when you press and hold the End key. (By default, pressing
and holding the End key locks your device to prevent accidental keypresses. To reassign
pressing and holding of the End key to another function, tap Start > Settings > All Settings, tap
Personal tab > Buttons > End Key tab, and then select the new function.)
Hearing Aid Compliance Enable this setting to reduce interference when using the device while
wearing a hearing aid.
Input Set options for each of the input methods.
Keyboard Sliding Sound Select a sound to play when you open and close the hardware keyboard.
Lock Set a password for your device.
Menus Set which programs will appear in the Start menu. (The Start menu is disabled when the
TouchFLO 3D Home screen and Start screen are enabled. To disable these two screens so that
the Start menu can be enabed, tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Personal tab > Today > Items tab,
and then clear the TouchFLO 3D check box.)
Owner Information Enter your personal information on your device.
Phone Customize phone settings such as ring tone, ring type, services, and other phone options.
Security Shows whether your device is locked for use with the Sprint SIM card.
Sounds & Notifications Enable sounds for events, notifications, and more, and set the type of
notification for different events.
Today Customize the appearance and the information that are shown on Windows Mobile’s
Today screen. (You will not see the Today screen when the TouchFLO 3D Home screen is
enabled. To disable the TouchFLO 3D Home screen so that the Today screen can be
displayed,tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Personal tab > Today > Items tab, and then clear the
TouchFLO 3D check box.)
Voice Command Choose which functions you want to access with voice commands.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
115
System Tab
Icon
Description
About See basic information such as the Windows Mobile® version and type of processor used
on your device. You can also specify a name for your device.
Auto Volume Control Automatically adjust the recording volume to an even level.
Certificates See information about certificates that are installed on your device.
Clear Storage Reset your device to factory default settings.
Clock & Alarms Set the device clock to the date and time of your locale or to a visiting time zone
when you’re traveling. Alarms can also be set at specified days and times of a week.
Customer Feedback Send feedback to the Customer Experience Improvement Program of
Microsoft.
Device Information See information about the firmware version, hardware, identity, and the duration
of calls made on your device.
Encryption Encrypt files on your storage card. Encrypted files will only be readable on your device.
Error Reporting Enable or disable the device's error reporting function. When this function is
enabled and a program error occurs, technical data about the state of the program and your
computer will be logged in a text file and delivered to Microsoft's technical support if you choose
to send it.
External GPS Set the appropriate GPS communication ports, if required. You may need to do this
when there are programs on your device that access GPS data or you have connected a GPS
receiver to your device. See Help for details.
G-Sensor Recalibrate the G-Sensor of the device. Use when autorotate or the Teeter game is not
working properly.
Managed Programs Displays the programs that were installed on your device using System Center
Mobile Device Manager.
Memory Check the device memory allocation status and storage card information.
Power Check the remaining battery power. You can also set the brightness of the backlight and
timeout for turning off the display (switching device to Sleep mode) to conserve battery power.
Regional Settings Set the regional configuration to use, including the format for displaying
numbers, currency, date, and time on your device.
Remove Programs Remove programs that you installed on your device.
Screen Recalibrate the screen, apply ClearType, and change the screen text size.
Task Manager Stop running programs and set the (
) button to end programs immediately
TouchFLO Set the device to vibrate when you tap the tabs, links, or other onscreen items of
supported applications.
116
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
System Tab (continued)
Icon
Description
TV Out Set the video format to use when outputting to an external display.
Update Firmware Download the most recent firmware.
Update PRL Download the most recent Preferred Roaming List.
Update Profile Renew or establish information needed to access network voice or data services.
Windows Update Link to Microsoft's website and update Windows Mobile on your device with the
latest security patches or fixes, if they are available.
Connections Tab
Icon
Description
Advanced Network (GSM mode) Set the GPRS authentication method, and set the line type to use
when making a circuit switch data (CSD) connection. You can also set text messages to be sent
either over GPRS or GSM.
Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on, set your device to visible mode, and scan for other Bluetooth
devices.
Comm Manager Manage your device’s connections (including data connection and Bluetooth),
turn the phone connection on or off, and enable or disable the Direct Push function.
Connections Set up one or more types of modem connections for your device, such as phone
dial-up, and more, so that your device can connect to the Internet or a private local network.
Domain Enroll Enroll your device in your company’s domain to let System Center Mobile Device
Manager to manage the device. Please ask your Server Administrator for more details.
USB to PC Set the type of USB connection to your PC. Select the ActiveSync option for
synchronizing data, or use Disk Drive mode for transferring files.
Wi-Fi Scan for available wireless networks.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
117
Changing Basic Settings
Display Settings
To manually adjust the screen brightness:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Power > Backlight tab.
3. Clear the Auto adjust backlight check box.
4. Adjust the brightness by dragging the slider under On battery power and On external power.
To set the backlight to dim after a time delay:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Power > Advanced tab.
3. In On battery power and On external power, select the Turn off backlight if device is not used for check box, and
then specify the time delay.
To increase or decrease the size of text on the screen:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Screen > Text Size tab.
3. Move the slider to increase or decrease the text size.
To recalibrate the touch screen:
The device touch screen is calibrated before shipment. Recalibrate the touch screen if it does not accurately
respond to screen taps.
1. While the device is on, press and hold the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons at the same time, and
then tap the screen with the stylus to open the align screen.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the calibration.
Device Name
The device name is used to identify your device when synchronizing with a computer, connecting to a
network, or restoring information from a backup.
If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a unique name.
Note
To change the device name:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap About > Device ID tab.
3. Enter the device name.
• The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, and cannot
contain spaces. Use the underscore character to separate words.
Notes
• If you enroll your device to your company’s domain, the device name will be changed to be the same as the
one used to enroll the device.
118
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
Sound Settings
To change the ring type and ring tone :
1. Tap Start > Settings > Sound.
2. Scroll down and then tap Ring Type. Select the Ring Type you want to use and then tap Done.
3. Tap Ringtone and then select the ringtone you want to use.
4. Tap Done.
• You can use *.wav, *.mid, *.mp3, *.wma, or other types of sound files that you downloaded from the Internet or
copied from your computer as ring tones. For a complete list of supported audio file formats for ring tones.
Tips
• To use your sound files as ring tones, copy them first to the /My Documents/My Ringtones folder on your
device, and then select the sound from the Ring tone list of your device. For more information about copying
To choose how to be notified about events or actions:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Sound. and then tap Advanced.
2. On the Sounds tab, choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes.
3. On the Notifications tab, in Event, tap an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting
the appropriate check boxes. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound, a message,
or a flashing light.
• Turning off sound notifications helps conserve battery power.
Tips
• The types of notifications that can be enabled depend on the event. For instance, only Play sound and
Vibrate notifications can be enabled if it is an ActiveSync event.
• Flashing light notification is either enabled or disabled., depending on the type of event. This setting is
preconfigured and cannot be changed.
Using Task Manager
Task Manager lets you view and stop running programs, configure the
button, and enable the Quick
Menu on the Home screen.
To open Task Manager:
ᮣ Tap the Quick Menu button on the top right corner of the Home screen to open the Quick Menu, and then
tap
.
– or –
Tap Start > Settings > All Settings. On the System tab, tap Task Manager.
To switch back to a running program:
ᮣ Tap the program name in the Quick Menu.
– or –
On the Task Manager screen, tap and hold the program name on the Running tab, and then tap Activate.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
119
To configure the Exit button:
You can configure the Exit button (
) to shut down running programs when the button is tapped, or to
just temporarily close the program screen but keep the program running.
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Button tab.
2. Select the Enable the “X” button to end running programs check box.
When the Enable the “X” button to end running programs check box is not selected, tapping the Exit button
will only close a program screen. The program is not ended and continues to run in the background.
Note
3. Choose the action for shutting down programs (by tapping the
button).
button, or by tapping and holding the
4. Tap ok.
To close running programs from the Task Manager:
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Running tab.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Select the check box of the programs that you want to close, and then tap Stop Selected.
Ⅲ Tap Stop All to close all programs in the list.
Ⅲ Tap Menu > Stop All but Selected to close all programs except those which check boxes are selected.
You can also close running programs from the Quick Menu on the Home screen. See “Quick Menu” on page
21 for details.
Tip
To add a running program to the exclusive list:
If you add a running program to the Exclusive Programs List, it will not be closed when you tap Stop Selected or
Stop All and will not be listed in the Quick Menu on the Home Screen.
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Running tab.
2. Tap and hold the program name, and then tap Add Exclusive.
To remove a program from the exclusive list, tap the Exclusive tab, select the check box of the program, and then
tap Remove.
Tip
To set the sorting preference and program icon size in the Quick Menu:
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Others tab.
2. In Sort programs in Quick Menu by, choose whether to sort according to Program name or Memory usage. The
list will be sorted in ascending order.
3. In Program icon size in Quick Menu, choose whether to use Small size or Large size.
Connecting to an External Display
The Video Out function allows you to view your device’s onscreen content on an external display (such as a
televison) that has composite jacks and uses a standard RCA connection cable.
• You need a Video Out cable accessory to be able to connect your device to an external display. The
Video Out cable accessory is sold separately.
Important
• The Video Out feature cannot be used with Sprint TV.
To connect the device to an external display:
1. Turn off the external display.
2. Connect the ends (red, white, and yellow RCA plugs) of the Video Out cable accessory to the
corresponding jacks on the external display.
3. Plug the other end of the Video Out cable accessory into your device's sync connector. The Video Out
screen opens.
4. Choose NTSC and then tap Done.
If you need to change the video format option again, tap Start > Settings > All Settings > System tab >
Video Out.
Note
5. Select the type of media you want to output.
6. Turn on the external display and then switch it to the input signal where your connected your device
(for example, Video 1).
The screen orientation is always in landscape mode while your device is connected to the external display.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
121
Protecting Your Device
You can help keep your data more secure by requiring a password every time the device is turned on.
To set a device password:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, tap Lock.
3. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, and then specify the idle time before the device requires a
password.
4. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use.
If your device is configured to connect to a network, use an alphanumeric password for increased security.
Tip
5. Enter the password in both the Password and Confirm boxes.
6. Tap ok. The next time the device is turned on, you will be prompted to enter your password.
• To ensure that you can always make emergency calls, do not begin your password with the digits of your
local emergency number.
Notes
• If you entered a hint, the hint will be displayed after the wrong password is entered five times.
• Each time a wrong password is entered, the device response time gets longer until the device appears to be
not responding.
• If you forget your password, you can hard reset or clear the device memory. Before you do this, make sure
you back up your data and files so that you can restore them back to your device. For more information about
hard resetting the device and clearing the memory, see “Resetting Your Device” on page 123.
Managing Memory
To see how much memory is available for use:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Memory > Main tab. The amount of memory allocated to data storage versus
program storage is displayed, as well as the amount of memory in use versus the available memory.
Adding and Removing Programs
Additional programs that you purchased can be installed and uninstalled on your device. Your device does
not allow you to uninstall most of the preinstalled programs.
Before you purchase additional programs for your device, make sure that they are compatible with your device.
Note
Before you launch the program installer, check first whether the installer can directly run on Windows Mobile
or needs to be run on a computer.
To install a program directly on your device:
1. If the installer is a .cab file, directly download or copy it to your device.
2. On your device, open File Explorer and navigate to the installer file.
3. Tap the file to launch the installer.
122
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
4. Choose whether to install the program into the main memory or your storage card, if one is installed on
your device.
5. Wait for the installation to complete.
You may be prompted to restart your device after installation is completed.
Note
To install a program from your computer:
1. If the installer is an .exe file such as Setup.exe, the installer will probably need to be run on a computer.
Download or copy it to your computer.
2. Connect your device to your computer using the USB cable, and then double-click the installer file on
your computer to launch the installer.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions on your computer and your device to complete the installation.
To uninstall a program:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > System tab > Remove Programs.
2. In the Programs in storage memory list, select the program you want to remove, and then tapRemove.
Resetting Your Device
Soft Reset
Occasionally, you may need to reset your device. A soft (or normal) reset of your device clears all active
program memory and shuts down all active programs. This can be useful when your device is running
slower than normal, or a program is not performing properly. A soft reset is also necessary after the
installation of some programs. If a soft reset is performed when programs are running, unsaved work will
be lost.
To perform a soft reset:
1. Pull out the stylus.
3. Use the stylus tip to press the Reset button located at the back of the device.
Your device restarts and displays the Home screen.
4. Replace the back cover and insert the stylus back into its compartment.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
123
Hard Reset
You can also perform a hard reset (also known as a full reset). A hard reset should only be performed if a
normal reset does not solve a system problem. After a hard reset, the device is restored to its default
settings—the way it was when you first purchased it and turned it on. Any programs you installed, data you
entered, and settings you customized on your device will be lost. Only Windows Mobile software and other
preinstalled programs will remain.
Your device will revert to factory default settings. Make sure that any additional installed programs or user
data have been backed up before you perform a hard reset.
Warning
If Encrypt files when placed on a storage card is enabled, back up all files from the microSD card before
using Clear Storage, hard reset, or updating the ROM system software. Otherwise you will no longer be
able to access the encrypted files on the microSD card. Use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center
to transfer files between your microSD card and computer. After the procedure, copy those files back to
the microSD card.
Important
To perform a hard reset:
1. With the device turned off, press and hold the Talk and End keys first, and then press and hold the Power
button until you see the following message on the screen:
This operation will delete
all your personal data,
and reset all settings to
manufacturer default.
Press VolUp to restore
manufacturer default, or
press other keys to cancel.
2. Release the Talk key, End key, and Power button.
3. Press the Volume Up button to restore the device to factory default status.
– or –
Press any other front panel key to cancel the hard reset and just power on the device.
Clearing Storage
If you can access the device settings, you can use Clear Storage to reset your device back to factory default
settings.
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Clear Storage.
3. Enter “1234” and then tap Yes.
124
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
Windows Update
You can update Windows Mobile on your device with the latest updates, security patches or fixes, if these are
available.
The first time you run Windows Update, you need to set up how you want Windows Update to check for the latest
updates on the Microsoft website.
Note
To set up Windows Update:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.
3. On the Update Setup screen, tap View privacy statement if you want to find out what types of information
Windows Update checks on your device when updating the Windows Mobile system on your device.
After reading the details, tap Done, and then tap Next to proceed to the next screen.
4. Choose how you want to check for updates (Manual or Automatic) and then tap Next.
If you select Automatic, you will be asked if you want to use your current data plan to check forupdates.
Select or clear the Use my data plan to check for and download updates check box and tap Next.
Note
5. Tap Finish.
To check for updates:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.
3. Tap Check Now.
Windows Mobile updates may not be available at all times. Check the Windows Mobile website for update
information.
Note
To change Windows Update options:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.
3. Tap Menu and then select the option you want to change.
Ⅲ Tap Connections to change how the device connects to the Internet when checking for updates.
Ⅲ Tap Change Schedule to change how Windows Update checks for Windows Mobile updates.
Section 2J. Managing Your Device
125
Section 3A
Sprint Service Features: The Basics
Now that you’ve explored your device’s fundamentals, it’s time to learn about the calling features that enhance your Sprint
service. This section outlines your basic Sprint service features.
Voicemail
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Voicemail Notification
There are several ways your device alerts you to a new voicemail message:
ⅷ By displaying the voicemail icon (
) in the title bar and a pop-up message.
ⅷ By displaying the number of voicemail messages on the TouchFLO 3D Home tab.
ⅷ By sounding the assigned alert or ringer type.
New Voicemail Message Alerts
When you receive a new voice message, your device alerts you that you have voicemail.
To call your voicemail:
ᮣ The number to call for new voicemail is shown on the TouchFLO 3D Home tab. Tap it to call your
voicemail.
— or —
Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen, and then tap and hold
on the Phone keypad.
128
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
You can listen to voice messages directly from your device or from any other touch-tone phone.
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network, you may not receive notification of new voicemail
messages. It is recommended that you periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area code + your wireless
Note
phone number. When your voicemail answers, press
and enter your passcode. You will be charged
roaming rates when accessing voicemail while roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network.
Your device accepts messages even when it is turned off. However, you are notified of new messages only when
your device is turned on and you are in a Sprint service area.
Using One-Touch Message Access
ᮣ Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen, and then tap and hold
on the Phone keypad.
Using Another Phone to Access Messages
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When your voicemail answers, press *.
3. Enter your passcode.
When you call into voicemail, you first hear the header information (date, time, and sender information) for the
message. To skip directly to the message, press during the header.
Tip
Voicemail Key Guide
Below are some Phone keypad functions that you can use while listening to voicemail messages. For further
details and menu options, see “Voicemail Menu Key” on page 130.
Date/Time
Replay
Erase
Send Reply
Rewind
Advance
Forward
Save
Return Call
Help
Cancel
Skip
Voicemail-to-Voicemail Message Reply
Reply to a voice message received from any other Sprint Voicemail user.
1. After listening to a voice message, tap on the Phone keypad.
2. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your reply.
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
129
Using Expert Mode
Using the Expert Mode setting for your personal voicemail box helps you navigate through the voicemail
system more quickly by shortening the voice prompts you hear at each level.
1. Tap and hold
to access your voicemail. (If your voicemail box contains any new messages, tap
to access the main voicemail menu.)
2. Tap
3. Tap
4. Tap
to change your Personal Options, following the system prompts.
for Expert Mode.
to turn Expert Mode on or off.
Voicemail-to-Voicemail Message Forwarding
Forward a voice message, except those marked “Private,” to other Sprint Voicemail users.
1. After listening to a voice message, tap
on the Phone keypad.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.
3. Follow the voice prompts to record your introduction and forward the voice message.
Extended Absence Greeting
When your device is turned off or you are off the Nationwide Sprint Network for an extended period, your
device can play this greeting instead of your normal personal greeting.
1. From the main voicemail menu, tap
on the Phone keypad for Personal Options.
2. Tap
for Greetings.
to record an Extended Absence Greeting.
3. Tap
Voicemail Menu Key
Following the prompts on the voicemail system, you can use the keypad on the Phone screen to navigate
through the voicemail menu. The following list outlines the voicemail menu structure.
Listen
Date and Time Information
Send a Reply Message
Advance a Few Seconds
Replay
Rewind a Few Seconds
Forward Message
Erase
Return This Call
Save
Options
Skip to the Next Message
130
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
Send a Message
Personal Options
Settings
Skip Passcode
Autoplay
Play Back Date, Time, and Caller Info.
Change Passcode
Group Distribution Lists
Numeric Paging
Return to Personal Options Menu
Greetings
Personal Greetings
Name Announcement
Extended Absence Greeting
Return to Personal Options Menu
Expert Mode
Place a Call
Exit
Text Messaging (SMS)
With Text Messaging (SMS), you can send and receive instant text messages between your device and
another messaging-ready device. When you receive a new text message, it will notify you by sounding the
assigned alert or ringer type and then displaying the SMS icon (
) in the title bar.
Text Messaging includes a variety of preset messages, such as “I’m running late,” “I’ll be right there,” and
more, which make composing messages fast and easy. You can use your device to customize your own
preset messages.
Creating a New Text Message
From the TouchFLO 3D Home Screen
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Messages tab.
2. Touch the New icon (
) on the upper right side of the screen.
To send a text message to a favorite contact, first tap the photo of the desired contact in the People tab to open
his or her contact card and then touch Send Message. For more information about working with favorite
Tip
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
131
From the Messaging Screen
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging > SMS / MMS.
2. Tap Menu > New > SMS.
From the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All Contacts.
2. Tap the contact’s name to open his or her contact card.
3. Tap Send Message.
From Windows Mobile Contacts
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts.
2. Tap the contact’s name to open his or her contact card.
3. Tap Send text message.
Composing and Sending a Text Message
After creating a new text message, follow the steps below to enter your message and then send it.
1. To add recipients, enter their mobile phone numbers in the To field, separating them with a semicolon. You
can also tap To or tap Menu > Add Recipient to add mobile phone numbers from Contacts.
2. Enter your message.
To choose from preset messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap a desired message. To check the spelling, tap
Menu > Spell Check.
Tip
3. Tap Send.
Copying and Pasting Text
You can copy words or lines of text from a received message and then paste them to a new text message.
To copy and paste text to your new text message:
1. Open the message where you want to copy text from.
2. Tap Menu > Select Text.
3. Tap on the starting point where you want to begin copying, and then drag your finger to select the words
or lines of text.
4. After selecting the text, tap and hold on the selected text, and then tap Copy.
5. Create a new message. In the body of the message, tap and hold on the position where you want to
paste the text, and then tap Paste.
132
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
Managing Threaded Text Messages
Text messages that are sent to and received from a contact (or number) are grouped as a single thread in
your inbox. Threaded text messaging lets you see exchanged messages (similar to a chat program) with a
contact on the screen.
To reply to a text message:
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap a message thread to open it.
2. At the bottom of the screen, type your reply message and then tap Send.
Enter your reply
message here
To delete a message in the thread:
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap a message thread to open it.
2. Tap the Input Selector icon on the bottom of the screen and then select an onscreen keyboard such as Full
QWERTY or Phone Keypad. Tap
that you want to delete.
or
to navigate up or down the thread and select a message
3. Tap Menu > Delete.
To delete all messages in a thread:
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap and hold a message thread that you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
133
To reply to a text message with an MMS message:
You can reply to a text message in a thread using an MMS message.
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap a message thread to open it.
2. Tap Menu > Insert, and then in the menu, select the item you want to insert: Video, Picture, Audio, vCard,
vCalendar, or Attachment..
A vCard is a contact card containing details about a selected contact, whereas a vCalendar is a calendar
appointment.
Note
3. Tap Menu > Advanced Composer if you want to compose your picture or video message and add text,
emoticons, audio, or more attachments. See “Video and Picture Messaging (MMS)” on page 134 for
details.
4. Tap Send.
Video and Picture Messaging (MMS)
Sending video and picture messages to your friends and family is fun and easy. You can include text with
emoticons, videos or photos, audio, and file attachments.
• If your Sprint service plan does not include Video and Picture Messaging, you will first be prompted to
subscribe to the service for an additional monthly charge.
Notes
• Make sure the size of the picture or video message is within the allowed limits while sending it to another
wireless phone user or to an email address.
Creating and Sending Video and Picture Messages
You can compose a video or picture message in a combination of various slides, where each slide can
contain text with emoticons, a video clip or a photo, an audio clip, and file attachment(s).
To compose a picture or video message:
1. Before creating a picture message, set the resolution first for photos to be sent in your picture messages.
In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap Menu > Pics/Video Options, and then select a photo resolution on the
Preferences tab. Tap ok when done.
2. From the Home screen, slide to the Messages tab and then tap All Messages.
– or –
Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging > SMS / MMS.
3. Tap Menu > New > Video Message or Picture Message.
4. In To, enter the recipient’s phone number or email address.
– or –
Tap To, select a contact name, and then select the phone number or email address to send to.
To send a copy of your video or picture message to others, drag the scrollbar up to display the Cc and Bcc
fields, and then enter their phone numbers or email addresses.
Tip
5. Enter a subject for your message.
6. Tap Insert video or Insert photo to select a video or photo and insert it.
Ⅲ To record a new video, tap the Capture Video icon (
).
Ⅲ To capture a new photo, tap the Capture Image icon (
).
134
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
7. Tap Insert text here to enter text as well as add emoticons, URL of a favorite website, a preset message,
contact information of a certain contact, and/or calendar appointment details. Tap ok when done
inserting.
8. To add audio, tap Insert audio. You can select an existing audio file, or record a new audio clip by tapping
the audio recording buttons at the bottom of the screen.
9. When you are ready to send your video or picture message, tap Send.
While composing your video or picture message, you can also do the following:
Tips
• To remove a video, photo, text, or audio, open the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard, and
then use the Up or Down key to highlight the item you want to delete. After selecting the item,
• Tap Menu > Slides > Insert Slide to add a new slide. Tap Menu > Slides > Delete Slide to remove a slide.
• If you have added several slides, tap Menu > Slides > Organize Slides to rearrange the slides or set the
playback duration.
Viewing and Replying to Video and Picture Messages
To view a received video or picture message:
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap a received video or picture message to open it.
2. The video message is then played, or the picture message is displayed. Use the playback controls at the
bottom of the screen to stop or resume playback, display in full screen, and switch between slides if there
are several slides contained in the message.
3. Tap Contents to see a list of files included in the message. On the Message Contents screen, you can do
the following:
Ⅲ To select a file, open the sliding QWERTY keyboard and then press
or
.
Ⅲ To save a selected file, tap Menu > Save.
Ⅲ To save the contents of a text file to the My Text list, tap Menu > Save into My Text.
Ⅲ To associate a photo to one of your contacts, tap Menu > Assign to Contact.
To reply to a video or picture message:
1. In the SMS / MMS inbox, highlight a received video or picture message. To highlight a message, open
the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard and use its Up or Down key to higlight.
2. Tap Menu > Reply.
3. Select whether to reply using a video message or picture message, and then tap Done.
4. Compose your video or picture message, and then tap Send. For more information about creating and
composing a video or picture message, see “Creating and Sending Video and Picture Messages” on
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
135
Using Caller ID
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before answering the phone by displaying the number of the
incoming call. If you do not want your number displayed when you make a call while you are within the
Nationwide Sprint Network or a CDMA roaming network, follow these steps.
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Tap
on the Phone keypad.
3. Enter the number you want to call.
4. Press the Talk key to place the call.
To permanently block your number, call Sprint Customer Service.
Call Waiting
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you to incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your device’s screen
informs you that another call is coming in and displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and you
are in digital mode).
To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call:
ᮣ Press the Talk key. (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the second call.)
To switch back to the first caller:
ᮣ Press the Talk key again.
To temporarily disable Call Waiting:
ᮣ For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted, you can temporarily disable Call Waiting by
pressing
end the call.
before placing your call. Call Waiting is automatically reactivated once you
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls to another phone number – even when your device
is turned off. You can continue to make calls from your device when Call Forwarding is activated.
• You cannot forward your calls to an international number.
• You are charged a higher rate for calls you have forwarded.
Notes
To activate Call Forwarding:
1. On the Phone keypad, tap
.
2. Enter the area code and phone number to which your future calls should be forwarded.
3. Press the Talk key. (You will see a message and hear a tone to confirm the activation of Call Forwarding.)
To deactivate Call Forwarding:
1. On the Phone keypad, tap
.
2. Press the Talk key. (You will see a message and hear a tone to confirm the deactivation.)
136
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
Making a Three-Way Call
With three-way calling, you can talk to two people at the same time. When using three-way calling on the
Nationwide Sprint Network, the normal airtime rates will be charged for each of the two calls. Roaming
charges apply when you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network.
1. Place the first call or accept an incoming call.
2. To put the first call on hold and display the phone keypad so you can make the second call, you can do
one of the following:
Ⅲ Press the Talk key.
Ⅲ On the Phone screen, tap
.
Ⅲ On the Phone screen, tap
3. Tap the phone keypad keys to enter the second phone number, and then press the Talk key to make the
second call.
4. When you’re connected to the second party, do one of the following to begin the three-way call:
Ⅲ Press the Talk key.
Ⅲ On the Phone screen, tap
.
.
Ⅲ On the Phone screen, tap
If one of the parties in the current call hangs up, you and the remaining caller still remain connected.
To end the three-way call, press the End key or tap
. All other callers will be disconnected.
Roaming
Roaming is the ability to make and receive calls, send and receive text messages, or use data services when
you are off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Your device works anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint Network
and allows you to roam on other 1900 and 800 MHz digital networks where Sprint has implemented
roaming agreements.
Your device allows both voice and data roaming if these services are included in your service plan. Contact
Sprint to find out about roaming services and rates.
Recognizing the Roaming Icon on the Display Screen
Your device’s display screen always lets you know when you are off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime
you are roaming, the device displays the roaming icon ( ) in the title bar.
Remember, when you are using your device off the Nationwide Sprint Network, always dial numbers using
11 digits (1 + area code + number).
Tip
Roaming on Other Digital Networks
When you are roaming on digital networks, your call quality and security will be similar to the quality you
receive when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint Network. However, you may not be able to access
certain features, such as data services, depending on the available network.
If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide Sprint Network, your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in an
area where you think Sprint service is available, turn your device off and on again to reconnect to the network.
Note
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
137
Checking for Voicemail Messages While Roaming
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network, you may not receive on-device notification of new
voicemail messages. Callers can still leave messages, but you will need to periodically check your voicemail
for new messages if you are in a roaming service area for an extended period of time.
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Enter 1, the area code, and then your phone number.
3. Press the Talk key again to call your voicemail.
4. When you hear your voicemail greeting, tap
on the Phone keypad.
5. Enter your passcode at the prompt and follow the voice prompts.
When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network, voicemail notification will resume as normal.
Setting Roaming Options for Your Device
You can set roaming options for your device to better control your roaming costs.
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Options... > CDMA Services tab.
— or —
Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Personal tab > Phone > CDMA Services tab.
2. Select Roaming, and then tap Get Settings. The Phone: Roaming screen then appears where you can set
options such as the roaming mode as well as Call Guard notification and Data Roam Guard notifications.
Choosing a Roaming Mode
On the Phone: Roaming screen, you can enable or disable roaming by choosing one of the
following modes:
ⅷ Sprint Only to prevent roaming on other networks.
ⅷ Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide Sprint Network. When Sprint service is unavailable, your
device searches for an alternate system.
Using Call Guard
Your device has two ways of alerting you when you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network: the
onscreen roaming icon and Call Guard. Call Guard makes it easy to manage your roaming by requiring an
extra step before you can place or answer a roaming call. (This additional step is not required when you
make or receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint Network)
To turn Call Guard on or off:
ᮣ On the Phone: Roaming screen, select On or Off.
• Call Guard is turned off by default on your phone.
Note
• Automatic speed recognition (ASR) and speed dialing are not available when you are roaming with Call Guard
enabled.
To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:
1. Press the Talk key to display the Phone screen.
2. Enter 1, the area code, and then the seven-digit number. After entering the number, press the Talk key.
3. A pop-up message then appears, informing you that roaming rates will apply. Tap Dismiss to close
the message, and then tap 1 to place the call.
138
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
To answer incoming roaming calls with Call Guard on:
ᮣ When you have an incoming roaming call, tap Answer if you want to accept the roaming call.
If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you may need to take extra steps to make and receive roaming calls.
Note
Using Data Roam Guard
Depending on service availability and roaming agreements, your device may be able to access data
services while roaming on certain digital systems. You can use the Data Roam Guard to alert you when you
are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network and try to use data services such as messaging.
To set your Data Roam Guard notification:
On the Phone: Roaming screen:
ⅷ Select Never ask and the Allow roaming check box to always allow data roaming without prior notification.
ⅷ Select Never ask and then clear the Allow roaming check box to always disable data roaming.
ⅷ Select Always ask to enable the Data Roam Guard to always display a confirmation message and alert
whenever your device enters a roaming network.
ⅷ Select Default to enable data roaming internationally. The Data Roam Guard may display a confirmation
message and alert.
To use data services when Data Roam Guard is active:
When a notification message appears informing you that data roam charges may apply:
ⅷ Tap Roam or OK to allow data roaming.
ⅷ Tap Cancel if you don't want to allow data roaming.
If this is your first time using data roaming, the Data Roam Guard will display a second message, informing you
about how to change the notification setting.
Note
Section 3A. Sprint Service Features: The Basics
139
Section 3B
Web and Data Services
Your device allows you to wirelessly connect to the Internet, and with Sprint data services, you have access to a dynamic
variety of data services you will really use. Data services such as Web browsing, email, instant messaging, and
RSS feeds let you have fun, stay in touch, and stay informed no matter where you go on the Nationwide
Sprint Network, on a CDMA roaming network, or on a GSM international network when traveling in other
countries.
Ways of Connecting to the Internet
Your device’s networking capabilities allow you to wirelessly access the Internet or your corporate network
through one of the following connections:
You can also add and set up the following connections:
Note
• Dial-up: A Dial-up connection is used to dial up to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and connect to the
Internet or to your corporate network. To set up a dial-up connection, tap Start > Settings > All Settings >
Connections tab , tap Connections, and then tap Add a new modem connection. To get help instructions,
tap
and refer to the Help.
• VPN: A VPN connection is used to access your corporate network by using an existing Internet connection.
For information about setting up a VPN connection, see the Set Up Your Email guide.
• Proxy: A Proxy connection is used to access the Internet using an existing connection to your corporate or
WAP network. To set up a proxy connection, tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab , tap
Connections, and then tap Set up my proxy server. To get help instructions, tap
and search for the word
proxy in Help.
140
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Connecting via Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi provides wireless Internet access over distances of up to 300 feet (100 meters). To use Wi-Fi on your
device, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot.”
The availability and range of your device’s Wi-Fi signal depends on factors such as the number of walls and other
objects through which the signal must pass and background interference caused by microwave ovens and other
devices that generate RF signals.
Note
Connecting to a Wireless Network for the First Time
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications to open the Comm Manager.
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap Wi-Fi. Detected wireless networks are then displayed on the screen.
3. Tap the desired wireless network.
Ⅲ If you selected to connect to an open (unsecured) network, your device will be automatically connected
to the network.
Ⅲ If you selected a secured network, enter the security key and then tap Done. Your device will then be
connected to the network.
4. Tap Back to return to the Comm Manager, and then tap Exit to close the Comm Manager.
When enabled, the On indicator is activated and available wireless networks will be detected. Follow the
network.
The next time you connect your device to the same secured wireless network, you will not be prompted to
enter the network key again (unless you perform a hard reset or clear storage which will erase custom
settings on your device).
Wi-Fi networks are self-discoverable, which means no additional steps are required for your device to connect to a
Wi-Fi network. It may be necessary to provide a user name and password for certain closed wireless networks.
Note
Turning Wi-Fi On and Off
Once you have connected to a wireless network, you can turn Wi-Fi off when you do not need Internet
access and turn Wi-Fi back on anytime when you need to reconnect to the wireless network.
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications to open the Comm Manager.
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap the OFF/ON switch for Wi-Fi to turn it on or off.
3. If you want to change the Wi-Fi connection to another wireless network, follow the same steps in
Checking Wireless Network Status
You can check the current wireless connection status from any of the following screens of your device:
ⅷ Title bar. When you enable Wi-Fi on your device, the Wi-Fi ON icon appears on the title bar. After Wi-Fi is
turned on, your device scans for available wireless networks and the wireless signal icon
appears on
the title bar. The arrows in this icon move back and forth while your device is scanning for a wireless
network signal. Once your device successfully connects to a wireless network, the arrows stop moving.
ⅷ Wireless LAN screen. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Wireless Networks. On the Main tab, you will see the wireless
network that your device is currently connected to. The configuration and signal quality of the wireless
network are also shown
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
141
ⅷ Configure Wireless Networks screen. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab > Wi-Fi and then tap the
Wireless Networks button. This screen displays all available Wi-Fi networks in range.
Tap a wireless network in the list to view or change its connection settings.
To manually add a new wireless network, if available, tap Add New and enter or select the required
information in the subsequent screens.
To connect to a wireless network in the list, tap and hold on the desired network, and then tap Connect.
Saving Battery Power While Using Wi-Fi
Using Wi-Fi quickly consumes battery power. Turn off Wi-Fi when not in use. You can also enable power
saving settings.
1. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Wireless Networks > Power Mode tab.
2. Move the Power Save Mode slider to a position that optimizes performance with the least power
consumption.
For example, move the slider to the left (Best Performance) to have the optimal wireless network
performance; move to the right (Best Battery) to obtain the maximum battery usage.
Getting Started With Data Services
Sprint enhances data services with increased broadband speed, and gives you clearer, high-quality visuals
and sound when you preview videos and music online. It also offers you exciting services such as Sprint TV,
the Sprint Music Store, and YouTube. (For more information about Sprint TV, the Sprint Music Store, and
Data Services
Here is a brief list of the data services available for your device. For more information, please visit us online
at www.sprint.com.
Web Browsing – Experience full-color graphic versions of popular websites from your device. You can use the
Opera Mobile (page 145) or Internet Explorer Mobile browser (page 147) to search and browse websites.
device.
Information Services – View the latest news, sports, stock quotes, travel information, and more using the built-in
Your User Name
When you buy your device and sign up for service, you’re automatically assigned a user name. When you
use data services on your device, your user name is submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint
Network. Your user name will be automatically programmed into your device. You don’t have to enter it.
Finding Your User Name
If you aren’t sure what your user name is, you can easily find it on your device.
ᮣ Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > System tab > Device Information > Version tab.
If you choose to change your user name and select a new one online, you must then update the user name on
your device. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > System tab > Update Profile.
Tip
142
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Connecting to Data Services
To connect to data services and access the Internet, you can simply launch the Web browser on your
device. You can also connect to data services from the Connections settings screen or the Comm Manager.
Connecting to Data Services Using a Web Browser
ᮣ The fastest way to access data services is by simply launching the Opera Mobile browser from
the Internet tab on the Home screen. From the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab and then tap
Launch Browser.
– or –
You can also launch Opera Mobile by tapping Start > All Programs > Opera Browser.
– or –
To access data services using Internet Explorer Mobile, tap Start > All Programs > Internet Explorer.
Your data connection starts and the Sprint Powerdeck home page is displayed:
Sprint Powerdeck Home Page
When you open a Web page in Opera Mobile, the page may be displayed in its smallest size. To reformat Web
pages to fit the screen of your device so that the content is readable, set Opera Mobile to display in Mobile View.
Note
Tap
> Settings > Display, and then select the Mobile view check box.
Connecting to Data Services from the Connections Screen
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. On the Connections tab, tap Connections.
3. Under the Sprint item, tap Manage existing connections.
4. Tap and hold Sprint to open a shortcut menu, and then tap Connect.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
143
Connecting to Data Services from the Comm Manager
1. Do one of the following to open the Comm Manager:
Ⅲ Tap Start > Settings > Communications.
— or —
Ⅲ Tap Start > All Programs > Comm Manager.
— or —
Ⅲ Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab > Comm Manager.
2. Tap Data Connection. The ON/OFF switch turns yellow and the switch is in the ON position when your
device is connected to data services.
Data Connection Status Icons
Your device displays the current status of your data connection through status icons at the top of the screen.
The following symbols are used for data connections:
A high-speed connection to the Sprint Mobile Broadband network (EVDO) or a
or
Sprint 1xRTT data connection is available. These icons in conjunction with the data
connection icons below let you know what type of connection your device is using.
An HSDPA, 3G, GPRS or EDGE network connection when you are roaming
internationally.
,
,
, or
Your device has an active connection to the Sprint Mobile Broadband (EVDO),
Sprint 1xRTT data network, or a 3G/GPRS/EDGE international network. When
active, data is being transferred and you cannot receive calls.
Your device’s data connection is idle. You can receive incoming calls.
If none of the above status icons are displayed, your device does not have a current data connection. To
Disconnecting from Data Services
When you do not need to use data services, disconnect your data connection to save battery power and
data cost.
1. Do one of the following to open the Comm Manager:
Ⅲ Tap Start > Settings > Communications.
— or —
Ⅲ Tap Start > All Programs > Comm Manager.
— or —
Ⅲ Tap Start > Settings > All Settings > Connections tab > Comm Manager.
2. Tap Data Connection. The ON/OFF switch turns white and the switch is in the OFF position when your
device has disconnected from data services.
144
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Navigating the Web
To search, browse, and navigate the Web on your device, you can use either the Opera Mobile or Internet
Explorer Mobile application.
Using Opera Mobile
Opera Mobile™ is a full-featured Internet browser, optimized for use on your device.
Opening Opera Mobile and Entering a Web Address
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab and then tap Launch Browser.
— or —
Tap Start > All Programs > Opera Browser.
2. If the address bar does not appear, tap
at the bottom-right corner of the screen to display it.
3. Tap the address bar, enter the URL, and then tap
.
When you open a Web page in Opera Mobile, the page may be displayed in its smallest size. To reformat Web
pages to fit the screen of your device so that the content is readable, set Opera Mobile to display in Mobile view.
Note
Tap
> Settings > Display, and then select the Mobile view check box.
The Browser Screen
8
1
2
5
3
4
6
7
9
1. Refresh. Tap to reload the Web page being viewed.
2. Address bar. Enter the URL of a website here.
3. Back. Tap to go back to the previous Web page viewed.
4. Favorites. Tap to go to the Favorites screen where you can add a favorite, edit favorite Web pages, and
send the favorite URL link via one of the Messaging accounts.
5. Tabs. Tap to add a new browsing tab or switch to another existing browsing tab.
6. Home. Tap to go to the Home page.
7. Menu. Tap to open a menu where you can change Opera Mobile settings, check downloads, view History,
and more.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
145
8. Close tab. Tap to close the current tab. This is enabled only if you have more than one tab opened.
9. Exit Full Screen mode. When browsing the Web, Opera Mobile automatically switches to full-screen mode.
Tap to show the address and Menu bars again.
Searching for Information on the Web
1. On the Opera Mobile screen, tap the address bar.
2. Enter a keyword on the Search field, and then tap
.
Address bar
Search field
Viewing Web Pages
While browsing Web pages, use finger gestures to pan and zoom on the Web page. To zoom in, slide to the
right of the Zoom bar. To zoom out, slide your finger to the left.
You can also tap the screen twice to zoom in, and tap twice again to zoom out.
Touch and hold an empty area on a Web page to open a shortcut menu that lets you go back to the previous
page, reload the page, add the page as a Favorite, and more. You can also tap and hold a link or image on a Web
page to open a menu with different options.
Tip
Changing the Screen Orientation
ᮣ Change the screen orientation by simply turning your device sideways.
146
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Opera Mobile Menu
On the menu bar, tap
to open the menu.
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
1. Settings. Tap to open the Settings screen where you can set the default home page, change display
settings, set privacy settings, and more.
2. Downloads. Tap to view items being downloaded. You can also resume or stop current downloads.
3. Page Info. Tap to view information about the Web page you are browsing.
4. History. Tap to see Web pages that you have viewed.
5. Saved Pages. Tap to manage and view Web pages that you have saved.
6. Help. Tap to open the Opera Mobile help file.
7. Exit. Tap to close Opera Mobile completely. Opera Mobile will not run in the background.
For more information about using Opera Mobile, go to: http://www.opera.com/products/mobile/.
Note
Using Internet Explorer Mobile
Internet Explorer® Mobile is the standard Web browser that is included with Windows Mobile.
Entering a Website Address and Adding It as Your Web Favorite
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Internet Explorer.
2. Tap on the address bar, enter the Web address of the desired website, and then tap
3. Tap Menu > Add to Favorites.
.
Zooming In or Out of a Web Page
1. Tap Menu > Zoom Out first to zoom out to the smallest size.
2. Internet Explorer then enters zoom mode. Tapping Zoom In or Zoom Out at the bottom of the screen will
allow you to zoom in or out of the Web page one step at a time.
3. Double-tap the screen to exit zoom mode and display the Web page at normal size.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
147
Viewing a Web page Using Finger Gestures
ⅷ Slide your finger upward to scroll down the Web page, or slide your finger downward to scroll up the
Web page.
ⅷ To pan downward, tap and hold on the screen, and then drag your finger upward. To pan upward, tap and
hold on the screen, and then drag your finger downward.
ⅷ To pan towards the right, tap and hold on the screen, and then drag your finger to the left. To pan towards
the left, tap and hold on the screen, and then drag your finger to the right.
ⅷ To pan freely around a Web page, tap and hold on the screen, and then drag your finger in the
desired direction.
Copying Text from a Web Page
1. Tap Menu > Copy/Paste > Make Selection.
2. Drag your finger across the screen to highlight desired words or lines of text.
3. After selecting the desired text, tap Copy.
4. Create a message or open a document and then paste the text.
Saving an Image from a Web Page
1. Tap and hold the image to open a shortcut menu and then tap Save Image As.
2. In the Name field, enter an image file name or use the existing file name.
3. Choose whether to save the image file to the main memory or storage card first before you select a folder
where to save the image file.
4. Choose whether to save the image as a JPEG or BMP file.
5. Tap Save.
The Browser Menu
Tap Menu to choose from a list of options that will let you change the text size of a Web page, save favorites,
and more.
Options available in the browser menu include:
ⅷ Favorites. Allows you to access and manage your favorites.
ⅷ Add to Favorites. Marks the current website as your favorite.
ⅷ Go to Web Address. Highlights the address bar and allows you to enter a Web address.
ⅷ Home Page. Sets the current Web page as the default home page.
ⅷ History. Displays a list of websites that you previously accessed and allows you to quickly return to a
visited website.
ⅷ Forward. Moves forward to a previously viewed Web page.
ⅷ Refresh. Reloads the current Web page.
ⅷ View. Allows you to change how a Web page is displayed. You can choose from the following options:
Ⅲ Text Size. Allows you to choose the font size for the text.
Ⅲ Full Screen. Displays the current Web page in full-screen view. To change back to the normal view, tap
and hold on the Web page to open a shortcut menu, and then tap Full Screen.
Ⅲ Mobile. Fits the content within the screen width of your device so that you can see most of it without
having to scroll horizontally.
Ⅲ Desktop. Keeps the same layout and size as on a desktop computer, which will require both horizontal
and vertical scrolling.
148
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Ⅲ Tools. Additional options you will find in this submenu include:
● Send Link. Allows you to send the current Web address in a text message, picture message, video
message, or email message.
● Properties. Displays information about the current Web page such as file size.
● Options. Allows you to change various browser settings such as the default home page, to clear the
browser’s history or cookie files, and more.
Using Windows Live
Windows Live™ gives you a full Internet experience on your device. Windows Live™ helps you to find
information, pursue your interests, and get in touch with friends and family on the Internet easier.
Windows Live offers the following key features:
ⅷ Live Messenger, the next generation of MSN Messenger Mobile.
ⅷ Live Mail, the next generation of Hotmail.
ⅷ Live Search, which lets you find locations, browse maps, and check for directions. See “Windows Live
ⅷ Live Contacts, your address book for storing Live Mail, Live Messenger, and Hotmail contacts.
Setting Up Windows Live
The first time you use Windows Live, sign in using your Windows Live ID, which is your Windows Live Mail or
Hotmail address, and password.
To set up Windows Live for the first time:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Windows Live, and then tap Sign in to Windows Live.
2. Tap the links to read the Windows Live Term of Use and the Microsoft Privacy Statement. After reviewing
them, tap Accept.
3. Enter your Windows Live Mail or Hotmail address and password, ensure that the Save password check box is
selected, and then tap Next.
4. Tap Next.
5. Choose what information you want to sync online with your device.
Ⅲ If you select Store Windows Live contacts in your mobile phone’s contact list, your Windows Live contacts will
be added to the contact list and to Windows Live Messenger on your device.
Ⅲ If you select Sync e-mail, your Windows Live Mail or Hotmail inbox messages will be downloaded to
your device.
6. Tap Next.
7. After synchronization is complete, tap Done.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
149
The Windows Live Interface
On the Windows Live main screen, you will see a search bar, navigation buttons, and an area where you can
show and customize your profile.
1
2
3
4
1. Search Bar. To search for websites, enter search keywords and then tap
.
2. Navigation Buttons. Tap the left or right arrow to switch between Windows Live Messenger, Windows Live
Mail, and Sync status.
3. Display Picture. Tap your display picture to change your display name, picture, or personal message.
4. Menu. Tap Menu to access and change settings.
Windows Live Messenger
With this mobile version of Windows Live Messenger, you enjoy many of the same features that you get from
the desktop version, which include the following:
ⅷ Instant messaging via text and voice
ⅷ Multiple conversations
ⅷ Inserting emoticons
ⅷ Contact list with online or offline status
ⅷ Sending and receiving files (including photos)
ⅷ Changing the status and display name
ⅷ Viewing contacts by online status, groups, and more
ⅷ Sending messages even when a contact is offline
Before you can use Windows Live Messenger, your device must be connected to the Internet. To find out how to
Note
150
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Launching Messenger and Signing In
1. To open Windows Live Messenger:
Ⅲ Tap Start > All Programs > Messenger.
– or –
Ⅲ On the Windows Live main screen, tap the left or right arrow until you see Messenger, and then tap it.
2. Tap Sign in on the Messenger screen.
3. If this is your first time to sign in, a message appears to inform you that your messenger contacts will be
added to the contact list on your device. Tap OK to add them. Signing in may take several minutes,
depending on your connection speed.
To sign out from Windows Live Messager, tap Menu > Sign out.
Tip
Starting and Ending Conversations
1. Select a contact, and then tap Send IM to open a message screen. Enter your text message in the text
entry area of the message screen.
2. To add an emoticon, tap Menu > Add emoticon and then tap an icon from the list.
3. Tap Send.
4. To end a conversation with the current contact, tap Menu > End conversation.
• To send a file, tap Menu > Send. You can choose to send a picture, voice clip or any file.
Tips
• To invite one or more contacts to the conversation, tap Menu > Options... > Add participant.
• To send a voice message, tap Voice clip on the chat screen and then start talking. After you have recorded a
message, tap Send.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
151
Adding Windows Live Contacts
You can add new Windows Live contacts in Windows Live Messenger or in Contacts.
To add a Windows Live contact in Live Messenger:
1. Tap Menu > Add new contact.
2. Enter the email address of the contact, and then tap OK.
To add a Windows Live contact in Windows Mobile Contacts:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts.
2. Tap New, and then tap Windows Live.
3. In the IM box, enter the email address of the contact, which can be a Windows Live ID or any other
email address.
You can fill in other information about the contact, if desired. This is not necessary if you will communicate
with the contact only through Live Messenger or Live Mail.
Tip
4. Tap ok.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to add the new contact to your Windows Live contact list.
Google Mobile App
Google Mobile App features a convenient toolbar that gives you access to Google mobile applications, which
include the following:
ⅷ Google search bar. Allows you to enter keywords and search for information on the Web using Google
Search.
ⅷ Google Mail. Allows you to access your Google Mail account on the Opera Mobile browser.
ⅷ Google Maps. Allows you to download, install and use the Google Maps Mobile application on your device.
ⅷ YouTube. Allows you to download, install and use Google YouTube application on your device.
ⅷ Other Google applications. Includes Google mobile applications such as Calendar, News, Picasa Web
Albums, and more.
There is already a preinstalled YouTube program available on your device which is different from Google
YouTube. Installing Google YouTube will remove and replace the original YouTube program.
Warning
Installing Google Mobile App
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Google.
2. Opera Mobile then opens and displays a Google Web page containing a hyperlink to the Google Mobile
App. Tap the Download Google Mobile App hyperlink.
3. The next screen displays a message, asking whether you want to install the application. Tap Open and
follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.
152
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Displaying the Google Mobile App
Tap Start > All Programs > Google Mobile App to display the Google Mobile App. You will then see a toolbar on
top of the screen, right below the title bar.
2
3
4
5
1
1. Google search bar. To find information on the Web, use the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen
keyboard to enter a search keyword on the search bar and then press the Enter key on the keyboard.
Opera Mobile then opens and displays search results.
2. Google Mail (
). Tap to open Opera Mobile and display the Google Mail sign-in Web page so you
can log in and access your Google Mail messages.
3. Google Maps (
). This icon appears grayed out when the Google Maps Mobile application has not
yet been downloaded and installed on your device. Tap the grayed icon to download and install the
application. After installation is completed, open Google Mobile App to display the toolbar again and
then tap
to start using Google Maps Mobile.
4. Google YouTube (
). This icon appears grayed out when the Google YouTube application has not yet
been downloaded and installed on your device. Tap the grayed icon to download and install the
application. After installation is completed, open Google Mobile App to display the toolbar again and
then tap
to start using Google YouTube.
5. More From Google (
). Tap to access more Google mobile applications.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
153
Using RSS Hub
RSS Hub is an RSS reader that keeps you up-to-date with the latest news from the Internet. It monitors Internet
news channels and downloads the most current news updates and podcasts so you are instantly informed
of breaking news and events.
This section provides basics on using RSS Hub. For more information and tips on using RSS Hub, see
the RSS Hub Help on your device. Tap Start > All Programs > Help, tap Help for Added Programs, and then tap
RSS Hub.
Make sure you have an active Internet connection before using RSS Hub. To find out how to connect to the
Note
Subscribing to and Organizing News Channels
You must subscribe to news channels before you can receive RSS feeds.
To subscribe to news channels:
1. Tap Start > RSS Hub, and then tap Continue.
2. On the New Channel Wizard screen, select the Choose from a list of known Channels option, and then tap
Next. A list of RSS channels is displayed.
3. Channels are grouped by categories. To select all channels in a category, select the category check box.
You can also select the check boxes of individual RSS channels that you want to subscribe to.
If the RSS channel you want to subscribe to is not in the list of known channels, tap Back, and then select
another option on the New Channel Wizard screen. For more information about the available options, see the
RSS Hub Help on your device.
Note
Category
Channels
4. After selecting the desired channels, tap Finish.
5. The list of your selected channels appears. Tap Refresh to update the channels.
154
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
6. After the refresh is completed, the number of headlines per channel will be displayed on the right side of
the screen..
To add new channels:
1. In the channel list, tap Menu > Channel > New to open the New Channel Wizard screen.
2. Select an option, and then follow screen instructions to add new channels. For more information on New
Channel Wizard options, see the RSS Hub Help on your device.
To filter the channels in the display:
In the channel list, tap Menu > View, and then select:
ⅷ All to display all subscribed channels.
ⅷ Updated to display only those channels with unread headlines.
To manage channel categories:
ⅷ To view all the channels in a particular category, tap All Categories in the upper left area of the channel list,,
and then tap the category you want to display.
ⅷ To add a new category, tap Menu > Categories in the channel list to display all categories, and then tap
Menu > New.
ⅷ To rename or delete a category, tap Menu > Categories in the channel list to display all categories, select a
category, and then tap Menu > Rename or Menu > Delete.
ⅷ If you want to change the channel category, tap and hold the channel in the channel list, and then tap
Change Category. Select a new category and then tap ok.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
155
Viewing Headlines
Tap a channel in the channel list to display the headlines for that channel.
5
1
2
4
3
1.
New or unread headlines display in bold and are marked with a blue newspaper icon. When you
tap the headline, a news summary will be displayed. Scroll down the summary screen and then tap Read
More Online... to open the Opera Mobile browser and view the complete headline.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Headlines that have been read are marked with a gray newspaper icon.
Tap this icon to download the podcast or image attachment.
indicates that the podcast or image attachment is downloading.
After download is completed, tap this icon to play back the podcast or view the image.
After downloading a podcast, tap Menu > Podcast > Save to save a copy of the file to the device main memory
or microSD card (if one is installed.)
Tip
Sharing the Headline Link
To share a headline that you have read with other people, you can send the link to the headline in a text,
picture, video, or email message.
1. Tap a headline to view the news summary.
2. On the news summary screen, tap Menu > Send Link via Email.
3. Messaging opens and displays the Account Picker screen. Tap the account you want to use to send the
headline link.
4. Specify the recipients, and then send it.
156
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Accessing Sprint Instant Messaging
The Sprint Instant Messaging application provides you with access to popular instant messaging (IM)
communities, including AOL® Instant MessengerTM, MSN® Messenger, and Yahoo!® Messenger.
1. To launch Sprint Instant Messaging, tap Start > Instant Messaging. (You may need to scroll down the screen
to see the icon.)
2. A message appears, informing you to add a messaging and data plan to your service plan. Tap OK to
close the message.
3. Tap a community: AOL Instant Messenger, MSN Messenger, or Yahoo! Messenger.
4. Enter the required sign-in information for the selected community, such as user name or password, and
then tap Sign In.
The information required to sign in will vary depending on the instant messaging community you are accessing.
Note
The instant messaging screen for your selected community will then be displayed, and you can start chatting
online with your friends or family.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
157
Email Messaging
Types of Email Accounts
You can set up the following types of email accounts on your device:
ⅷ Outlook email messages that you sync with your computer or the Exchange Server.
ⅷ Email accounts that you have with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or other email provider.
ⅷ Web-based email accounts such as Yahoo!® Mail Plus, AOL®, and others.
ⅷ Work accounts that you access using a VPN connection. See the Set Up Your Email guide for details.
ⅷ Custom domain email accounts. The email domain name is hosted by a different email provider. For more
information, tap Start > All Programs > Help and then search for custom domain e-mail in Help.
Synchronizing Outlook Email with the Computer
If you have installed the synchronization software on your computer and created a partnership with your
device, and then your device is ready to send and receive Outlook email messages.
If you have not yet installed the synchronization software nor created a partnership, see “Setting Up Windows
71 for instructions.
To set up your company email account so that you can access Outlook email messages wirelessly, you must set
up your device to synchronize via an over-the-air connection with your company’s Exchange Server. For more
information about synchronizing with your company email server, see “Setting Up an Exchange Server
Tip
Setting Up an Internet Email Account
Use Mail Setup to easily add Web-based email accounts such as Yahoo! Mail Plus, AOL, and more.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab.
2. If this is your first time to set up an email account, tap New Account. If you are setting up subsequent
accounts, tap Menu > Accounts > New Account. The Mail Setup screen then opens, guiding you to set up
your email account.
3. Enter your email address and password, and then tap Next.
4. Enter your name and the account display name, and then tap Next. Mail Setup then searches for the
email provider settings on your device.
If the settings are not found on your device, you will be prompted to enter the email account settings
manually, such as the Incoming mail server and Outgoing mail server . Obtain the email account settings from
your email provider.
5. Tap the Automatic send/receive box, and then choose how frequent you want email messages to be
automatically sent and downloaded on your device.
6. Under Advanced settings, select the desired preferences.
7. Tap Done.
158
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Creating and Sending an Email Message
After setting up email accounts on your device, you can start sending and receiving email messages.
Starting from an Empty Email Message
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab.
2. Select the email account you want to use on the right side of the screen.
3. Touch the New Mail icon (
) to create a new email message.
Sending an Email Message to a Favorite Contact
1. From the Home screen, slide to the People tab.
2. Swipe your finger on the screen to flip through the photos of your favorite contacts.
3. When the photo of the desired contact is displayed, touch the displayed photo and then tap Send
Email.
To send email to a contact that is not on the People tab, tap All Contacts, scroll through the list, tap the desired
contact name, and then tap Send Email.
Tip
Composing and Sending an Email Message
After opening a new email message, follow the steps below to enter your message and then send it.
1. To add recipients, enter their email addresses, separating them with a semicolon. You can also tap To if
you want to add email addresses stored in Contacts.
2. Enter a subject and compose your message.
3. To choose from preset messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap a desired message. To check the spelling,
tap Menu > Spell Check.
4. To add an attachment to your message, tap Menu > Insert and tap the item you want to attach: Picture,
Voice Note, or File. Select the file or picture you want to attach, or record a voice note.
5. Tap Send.
Tip
• If you are working offline, email messages are moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent the next time you
connect.
Filtering the Inbox Message List
When the Inbox on your device is full of messages, you can filter your Inbox to display only the messages
that contain a particular sender or subject you are searching for.
To filter your Inbox:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging and then tap an email account.
2. Enter the sender name or email subject you want to look for. As you type characters, the message list
narrows down to the sequence of characters you have entered.
For example, entering “B”, and then “E” narrows the list to only the emails that contain sender names and
email subjects that start with “BE.”
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
159
Viewing and Replying to Email Messages
To view an email message:
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab, select an email account, and then tap Inbox.
2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to browse through received email messages.
3. Tap an email message to open it.
To download a complete email message:
By default, each email received in the inbox on your device contains only the first few kilobytes of the
message. When you open an email message, it displays only the headers and part of the message. You
must download the whole email to view the complete content.
To download a complete email message, open the email and then do one of the following:
ᮣ Finger-scroll to the end of the message, and tap Get entire message and any attachments (POP3 email
account) or tap Get the rest of this message (IMAP4 and Outlook email accounts).
— or —
Tap Menu > Download Message.
• The Fetch Mail feature, which is available for POP3 and IMAP4 Internet email accounts, downloads an entire
email without the need for you to perform a full synchronization. This limits the download to just the email
message that you want and helps save data cost. Fetch Mail is also available for Outlook Email. See “Instant
Notes
• Downloading may take some time, depending on the speed of your Internet connection, email file size, and
whether file attachments are automatically downloaded.
To download file attachments:
ⅷ POP3 email account: File attachments of a POP3 Internet email account are automatically downloaded when
you download a complete email.
ⅷ IMAP4 and Outlook email accounts: File attachments appear below the subject of an email message. Tapping
an attachment opens the attachment if it has been fully downloaded or marks it for download the next
time you send and receive email.
You can set automatic downloading of file attachments. See “Customizing Email Settings” on page 161 for
details.
To reply to or forward a message:
1. Open the message and tap Menu > Reply, Menu > Reply All, or Menu > Forward.
2. Enter your response, and then tap Send.
You can receive and view HTML email from any type of email account. The HTML format is retained, without layout
shifting or resizing. HTML email support in Outlook Mobile is available only if you are synchronizing your device
with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007.
Notes
160
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Synchronizing Email
Synchronizing email ensures that new email is downloaded to the device Inbox folder, that in the Outbox
folder is sent, and that email deleted from the server is removed from your device. The exact way that you
synchronize email depends on the type of email account you have.
To automatically synchronize an Outlook email account:
ᮣ Connect your device to your computer through USB or Bluetooth. Otherwise, connect through Wi-Fi or a
data connection if you are synchronizing Outlook email messages with the Exchange Server. For more
Synchronization automatically begins, and your device sends and receives Outlook email messages.
To manually synchronize your Outlook or Internet email account:
1. Slide to the Mail tab on the Home screen, or tap Start > All Programs > Messaging.
2. Select your Internet email account.
3. Tap Menu > Send/Receive.
Customizing Email Settings
You can make changes to your email account settings or customize the email download and size settings.
Modifying Internet Email Account Settings
1. From the Home screen’s Mail tab, tap Menu > Accounts > Accounts.
2. Tap Menu > Options and then tap the email account that you want to modify.
3. On the subsequent screen, you can:
Ⅲ Tap Edit Account Setup to modify your email account settings such as email address, password, and
more, if you previously mistyped or chose any wrong setting.
Ⅲ Tap Send/Receive Schedule to change the time interval for sending and downloading email to
your device.
Ⅲ Tap Download Size Settings to set the message format to either HTML or plain text, select a download size
for email messages, and choose whether or not to include file attachments when downloading email
(for IMAP4 accounts only).
Modifying Settings for Outlook Email
1. Disconnect your device from the computer.
2. Tap Start > ActiveSync.
3. Tap Menu > Options..., select E-mail, and then tap Settings.
4. On the E-mail Sync Options screen:
Ⅲ Under Message format, select HTML or Plain text.
Ⅲ Under Download size limit, select the desired email size.
Ⅲ Select whether to include file attachments when downloading email to your device.
5. Close ActiveSync and reconnect your device to the computer.
Storing Attachments on the microSD Card
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging.
2. Tap Menu > Options > Storage tab.
3. Select the When available, use this storage card to store attachments check box
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
161
Working With Company Email and Meeting Appointments
To keep up-to-date with your company email and meeting schedules while you’re out of the office, you can
connect your device to the Internet through Wi-Fi or your Sprint connection and synchronize with your
company’s Exchange Server.
Setting Up an Exchange Server Connection
Before you can synchronize or access information on the Exchange Server, you need to set up an Exchange
Server connection on your device. You need to get the following information from your network administrator
and enter them on your device:
ⅷ Exchange Server name (must be Outlook Web Access server name)
ⅷ Domain name
ⅷ User name and password that you use at work
If you have not synchronized your device with your computer, follow these steps to set up an Exchange
Server connection.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab.
2. Touch New Account at the bottom-right of the screen if this is your first time to set up an account.
Otherwise, if you have previously added other accounts on the Mail tab, touch Menu > Account > New
Account.
3. On the Mail Setup screen, enter your email address and password, select Exchange Email (Outlook), and
then tap Next.
4. Enter the domain name and server address, select the This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection
option, if needed, and then tap Next.
5. Clear the check boxes of the data types that you want to exclude from synchronization, and then
tap Done.
Your device synchronizes with the Exchange Server and downloads your Outlook email messages. If you
chose to sync all Outlook data, your Outlook contacts, appointments, and tasks will also synchronize with
your device.
• If you synchronized email with your computer before, open ActiveSync on your device, and then tap
Menu > Add Server Source to set up an Exchange Server connection. When prompted to select
information types for synchronization, you must first clear the E-mail check box under the Windows PC
item before you can select E-mail under Exchange Server.
Tips
• To change Exchange Server settings, open ActiveSync on your device, and then tap Menu >
Configure Server.
162
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Starting Synchronization
Before you start synchronizing with the Exchange Server, make sure your device has been set up with a
Wi-Fi or data connection to the Internet so that you can synchronize over the air. For more information
After you finish setting up an Exchange Server connection, your device automatically starts synchronization.
To manually start synchronization:
ᮣ Tap Start > Settings and then tapSync Data.
- or -
Tap Start > ActiveSync and then tap Sync.
If you connect your device to your office computer via a USB or Bluetooth connection, you can use this
connection to the computer to “pass through” to the network and download Outlook email messages and other
information to your device.
Note
Working With Company Email
Your device gives you instant access to your company email and lets you manage your messages easier.
Direct Push, Fetch Mail, Remote email search, and email flags are just some of the tools you can use to
manage your emails. This section shows you how to use these tools to manage your email.
Some messaging features depend on the Microsoft Exchange Server version used in your company. Check with
your network administrator for the availability of these features.
Note
Automatic Synchronization Using Direct Push
Direct Push technology (push email feature) enables you to receive new email messages on your device as
soon as they arrive in your Inbox on the Exchange Server. Items such as contacts, calendar, and tasks are also
immediately updated onto your device when these items have been changed or new entries have been added
on the Exchange Server. To make Direct Push work, you need to have a Wi-Fi or data connection on your
device.
You need to perform a full synchronization between your device and the Exchange Server first before Direct
Push can be enabled.
The Direct Push feature works for your device only if your company is using Microsoft Exchange Server
2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2) with Exchange ActiveSync or higher version.
Requirement
You can turn on Direct Push in the Comm Manager or ActiveSync.
To turn on Direct Push in Comm Manager:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Communications.
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap Microsoft Direct Push’s OFF/ON switch.
To turn on Direct Push in ActiveSync:
1. Tap Start > ActiveSync > Menu > Schedule.
2. Select As items arrive in the Peak times and Off-peak times boxes.
When Direct Push is off, you need to manually retrieve your emails.
Note
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
163
Scheduled Synchronization
If you do not want to use Direct Push, you can set a regular schedule for synchronizing Outlook email
messages and information.
1. In ActiveSync on your device, tap Menu > Schedule.
2. Select a shorter time interval in the Peak times box for you to be able to receive emails more frequently.
(Peak times usually refer to your working hours when email volume is high).
3. Select a longer interval in the Off-peak times box.
To set the days and hours that make up your peak and off-peak times, tap the peak times link at the bottom of
the screen.
Tip
Instant Email Download Using Fetch Mail
The Fetch Mail feature downloads an entire email message immediately without the need for you to perform a
full Send/Receive action. This limits the download to just the email message that you want and helps to
reduce data service charges.
Fetch Mail works for your device only if your company is using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or
higher.
Requirement
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Mail tab, select your Outlook account, and then tap Inbox.
2. Open an email message.
3. By default, only the first few words of the message is shown. To download the whole email message,
finger-scroll to the end of the message, and then tap Get the rest of this message.
4. Wait for the remainder of the message body to download.
• For information about changing email sync options such as setting the download size for email, see
Notes
• When you receive an email message that contains a link to a document such as a PDF or Microsoft Office
document located on SharePoint or an internal file server, you can tap the link to view the document on your
device. You can view the document only if you have a Microsoft Outlook account that synchronizes with
Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or later. Exchange Server must also be set up to allow access to SharePoint
document libraries or internal file servers.
Searching for Email on the Exchange Server
You can access email that is not available on your device by searching your Microsoft Exchange Server
mailbox. The search results are downloaded and displayed in a Search Results folder.
Your company must be using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or higher.
Requirement
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging > Outlook E-mail.
2. Tap Menu > Tools > Search Server.
3. In the Look for text box, enter the search keyword.
4. Choose the date range of messages to search from.
5. In the Look in list, specify whether to search in the Inbox, Sent Items, or All Folders.
6. Tap Search.
To clear the search results and return to the message list, tap Menu > Clear Results.
Tip
164
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Flagging Your Messages
Flags serve as a reminder for you to follow up on important issues or requests contained in email messages.
Flagging messages, which has been a useful feature on desktop Outlook Email, can also be done in
Outlook Mobile on your device. You can flag received email messages on your device.
Flags are enabled only if emails are synchronized with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or higher. Flags
are disabled or hidden if email is synchronized with earlier versions of Microsoft Exchange Server.
Requirement
To flag or unflag a message:
1. Open Outlook on your device and access the Inbox.
2. Select a message or open a message.
3. Tap Menu > Follow Up and select one of the following options:
Ⅲ Set Flag to mark the message with a red flag to indicate that it needs following up.
Ⅲ Complete Flag to mark the message with a check mark to indicate that the issue or request in the email
is already completed.
Ⅲ Clear Flag to remove the flag to unmark the message.
Email message reminders are displayed on your device if the messages are flagged with reminders and
synchronized from the Exchange Server.
Note
Out-of-office Auto-reply
Outlook Mobile allows you to retrieve and change your out-of-office status. Just like desktop Outlook Email,
Outlook Mobile automatically sends an auto-reply message when you’re not available.
To send out-of-office auto-reply messages:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Messaging > Outlook E-mail, and then tap Menu > Tools > Out of Office.
2. In the I am currently list, select Out of the Office.
3. Enter your auto-reply message, and then tap Done.
Managing Meeting Requests
When you schedule and send meeting requests from your device, you can invite attendees to your meeting
and check their status to know about their availability.
When you receive a meeting request, you can reply by accepting or declining the request. The meeting
request also clearly indicates whether there are conflicting or adjacent meetings.
Your company must be using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or higher.
Requirement
To reply to a meeting request:
1. When you receive a meeting request by email, a notification will be displayed on your device. Open
the email.
2. Tap Accept to reply and accept the meeting request, or tap Menu > Decline if you cannot attend the
meeting.
• Before responding, you can check your availability during the time of the requested meeting by tapping
View your calendar.
Tips
• If the time of the meeting conflicts with your other appointments, a “Scheduling Conflict” status appears
on top of the email.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
165
3. Choose whether to edit your response email before sending it, and then tap OK.
If you accepted the meeting request, it will automatically be added as an appointment in Calendar on
your device.
To view the list of meeting participants:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Calendar.
2. Tap a meeting request that you sent and then tap Attendees. The required and optional attendees will
be listed.
Icons indicating whether each attendee has accepted or declined the meeting request will also be
displayed.
• To see the icon indicators in the attendees list, make sure Calendar is synchronized with the Exchange Server.
Tips
• To view an attendee’s contact information, tap the attendee’s name. If the attendee is included in your
contacts list, you will see the contact information immediately. If the attendee is not in your contacts list, tap
Company Directory to view the contact information.
Finding Contacts in the Company Directory
In addition to having contacts on your device, you can access contact information from your organization’s
Company Directory. By having over-the-air access to the Company Directory, you can easily send email
messages and meeting requests to anyone in your company.
Access to the Company Directory is available only if your organization is running Microsoft
Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or higher, and you have completed your first synchronization with the
Exchange Server.
Requirement
When Browsing Contacts, Composing Email, or Creating a Meeting Request
1. Synchronize with the Exchange Server.
2. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ While browsing through your contacts on the Contacts or Phone screen, tap Menu > Company Directory.
Ⅲ In a new email message, tap the To box (or tap Menu > Add Recipient), and then tap Company Directory on
the top of the list.
Ⅲ When creating a meeting request and selecting required and optional attendees in Calendar, tap
Company Directory.
3. Enter a partial or full contact name and tap Search. In the search results list, tap a contact to select it.
• You can save a contact from the Company Directory to your device by selecting the contact, and then tapping
Menu > Save to Contacts.
Notes
• You can search on the following information as long as that information is included in the Company Directory:
First name, Last name, Email name, Display name, Email address, or Office location.
When Viewing a Received Outlook Email Message
1. Open a received Outlook email message.
2. If a Search button (
) appears to the right of the sender name in the email message, tap this button to
search for the sender in the Company Directory.
3. If the sender is found, the contact details will be displayed. You can then choose to save the sender to
your contacts, call the sender, and more.
166
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Using Your Device As a Modem
Internet Sharing connects your computer to the Internet by using your device’s data connection. You can
connect via USB or Bluetooth.
• To use a Bluetooth connection, make sure your computer has built-in Bluetooth capability. If your computer
does not have Bluetooth, you can connect and use a Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer.
Notes
• When you launch Internet Sharing, ActiveSync will automatically disconnect.
Setting Up Your Device as a USB Modem
1. On your device, tap Start > All Programs > Internet Sharing.
2. In the PC Connection list, select USB.
3. In the Network Connection list, select the name of the connection that your device uses to connect to
the Internet.
4. Plug in the USB Sync cable between your device and the computer, and then tap Connect.
Using Your Device as a Bluetooth Modem
For the computer to use the Internet connection of your device, activate Internet Sharing on your device, and
then set up a Bluetooth Personal Area Network (PAN) between the computer and your device.
1. On your device, turn on Bluetooth and set it to visible mode by following the steps in “Turning Bluetooth
2. Initiate a Bluetooth partnership from your device by following the steps in “Creating a Bluetooth
3. Tap Start > All Programs > Internet Sharing.
4. Select Bluetooth PAN as the PC Connection.
5. From the Network Connection list, select the name of the connection that your device uses to connect to
the Internet.
6. Tap Connect.
7. On your computer, set up a Bluetooth Personal Area Network (PAN) with your device:
For Windows Vista:
a. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.
b. Click Manage network connections and then under Personal Area Network, double-click Bluetooth Network
Connection.
c. In the Bluetooth Personal Area Network Devices dialog box, select your device, and then click Connect.
For Windows XP:
a. Click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.
b. Under Personal Area Network, click the Bluetooth Network Connection icon.
c. Under Network Tasks, click View Bluetooth network devices.
d. In the Bluetooth Personal Area Network Devices dialog box, select your device, and then click Connect.
If the Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer was installed using a third-party driver, open the
Bluetooth software that came with the Bluetooth adapter or dongle to connect your computer and device via
Bluetooth. Refer to the Bluetooth adapter or dongle documentation for more information.
Note
8. On the Internet Sharing screen on your device, check if a connected status message is displayed, which
indicates that your computer has been successfully connected to the Internet using your device as a
Bluetooth modem.
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
167
Ending the Modem Connection
On the Internet Sharing screen, tap Disconnect.
Using Remote Desktop Mobile
Remote Desktop Mobile lets you access your computer remotely from your device through the USB, Bluetooth,
Wi-Fi, or data connection and use programs which are available on your computer.
To configure the remote desktop display:
Before you connect to your remote computer, configure the Remote Desktop Mobile to optimize the remote
computer display on your device.
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Remote Desktop Mobile.
2. Tap Options.
3. On the Display tab, do any of the following:
Ⅲ In the Colors option, select 256 Colors.
Ⅲ Select the Full screen check box to display the remote desktop in full-screen mode.
Ⅲ When using programs which are specifically configured for use with your device, select the Fit remote
desktop to screen check box to adjust the desktop proportions to fit your device’s screen.
4. Tap the Resources tab, and then do the following:
Ⅲ In the Device storage option, select whether to map device storage to the remote computer or
disable mapping.
Ⅲ In the Remote desktop sound option, select Mute to mute audio, select Play on remote computer to play
audio on the remote computer, or select Play on this device to play audio on your device.
5. Tap ok.
To connect to a remote computer:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Remote Desktop Mobile.
2. On the Remote Desktop Mobile screen, enter the computer name (or IP address), user name, password,
and domain of the remote computer, and then select the Save password check box.
3. Tap Connect. When connected, you can now access and start using the desktop computer programs on
your device.
To disconnect from the remote computer:
ᮣ Tap Disconnect on your device.
– or –
When in full-screen mode, tap Start > Shut Down, tap Log Off, and then tap OK.
168
Section 3B. Web and Data Services
Section 3C
Entertainment: TV and Music
Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips and to view video clips right from your device’s
display. Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your favorite shows – anywhere on the
Nationwide Sprint Network.
Sprint Music lets you preview, purchase, download, and listen to over a million songs right on your device. You
can even add songs from your own library to round out your on-the-go playlist.
TV
Your Sprint TV Channel Options
The Sprint TV application offers a wide variety of accessible channels. Subscription options include
comprehensive basic packages as well as a full menu of “a la carte” channels. Visit www.sprint.com for more
information on channels and pricing.
Some of the available categories may include:
ⅷ Sprint Radio
ⅷ Primetime TV
ⅷ Sprint TV Live
ⅷ Sports
ⅷ Sprint Power View
ⅷ Music Videos
ⅷ Music & Radio
ⅷ Entertainment
ⅷ Cartoons
ⅷ News & Weather
ⅷ Mobile Previews
ⅷ Movies & Shorts
Available categories and content are subject to change.
Tip
Playing a Video or Audio Clip
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Sprint TV tab and then tap Launch.
— or —
Tap Start > All Programs > Sprint TV.
2. Tap Continue to connect to data services.
3. Select Sprint TV, Sprint Radio, Sprint Movies, or Premium Channels to display channel options.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
169
4. Select a channel from the Sprint TV listings or select an available category.
The first time you access a channel, you will be prompted to purchase access (unless the channel doesn't
have a monthly fee). Select Subscribe to purchase access, or select Preview to view a preview of the
selected channel.
Note
5. If applicable, select a clip and tap OK to view the program. The clip will automatically load and begin
playing.
While you are playing a clip, open the sliding QWERTY keyboard and then press
channel. A small pop-up screen will be displayed that tells you which channel you are watching as well as other
channels that you have access to. Press or to scroll through the channels. Once you find a channel
or
to surf to a different
Tip
that you want to watch or listen to, scroll to it and tap OK (or simply wait approximately three seconds), and the
channel will begin loading.
TV FAQs
1. How long are the clips? Will I know the estimated time it will take to play the clip prior to accessing it?
Once you have selected a channel, you will see a listing of the available clips, with each clip’s length
displayed after the clip’s title. In general, a clip’s duration will depend on the story or content being
provided, and can be fairly short or as long as a few minutes.
2. Can I access a clip wherever I am, as long as I have my device?
As long as you are on the Nationwide Sprint Network, you will have access to the audio and video clips.
3. Are the videos that I’m viewing “live” videos?
It depends on the content provider. Some of the channels available through Sprint TV stream live content.
Others provide media on demand with video and audio clips that are refreshed throughout the day, but
that are not “live.”
4. After purchasing access to an Available Channel for a monthly fee, do I receive any confirmation? That
is, how do I know it has been purchased?
The next time you access the channel, you bypass the Preview/Purchase page and go directly to the
available content.
5. If I don’t subscribe to a data services plan from Sprint, will I still be able to view the multimedia clips?
Yes. For service access charges, please consult your Sprint service plan or visit www.sprint.com.
6. What does it mean when the video pauses and I see the word “loading” at the bottom of the screen?
This happens when the phone is loading the data necessary to play the clip. It typically occurs when
there is heavy traffic on the network.
7. How can I cancel service if I decide I don’t want it?
To cancel your Sprint TV service, visit www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint Wireless with your account
number and password. From this page, you have the ability to cancel the service or any channels to
which you subscribe.
8. Can I surf to a different channel while I am playing a clip?
Yes. While you are playing a clip, you can open the sliding QWERTY keyboard and then press
to surf to a different channel. A small pop-up screen will be displayed that tells you which channel
you are watching as well as other channels that you have access to. Press or to scroll through
or
the different channels. Once you find a channel that you want to watch, scroll to it and press (or simply
wait approximately three seconds), and the channel will begin loading.
170
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Music — Sprint Music Store
The Sprint Music Store enables you to purchase and download digital music files to play on your device.
Accessing the Sprint Music Store
From the Sprint Music tab of the Home screen, you can connect to the Nationwide Sprint Network and access
the Sprint Music Store. When you enter the store for the first time, you will be prompted to set up your user
identification and password.
1. On the Sprint Music tab of the Home screen, touch the Sprint Music Store icon.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to establish your User ID and password.
Your User ID for the Sprint Music Store is your 10-digit wireless phone number. The password may be any
4-digit number.
Tip
3. After you have entered your password, highlight Create New Account and tap OK.
4. Use the sliding QWERTY keyboard to explore the store.
Purchasing and Downloading Music
Now that you’re in the store, you can shop for songs to purchase and download to your device’s main
memory or a microSD card.
1. From the Sprint Music Store opening page, select an option to browse the store:
Ⅲ Search gives you the option of searching for specific songs or artists. Just use one of the onscreen
keypads of your device to enter your search criteria in the available field.
Ⅲ Featured offers a revolving selection of highlighted songs and artists.
Ⅲ Genres allows you to choose from different types of music such as Hip Hop/Rap, R&B, Pop,
Inspirational songs, and more.
Ⅲ Categories allows you to choose from other types of categories.
2. Select a song by tapping on the song title. and tap OK. (The song information screen will be displayed.)
3. Tap Preview to play the selected song.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
171
4. When you are ready to purchase the song, tap on the displayed price. This confirms your purchase and
begins the download process.
The song will be downloaded to your device (\Music).
If you have a microSD card inserted, you have the option to download the song to it.
Note
Once the song has been downloaded to your device’s meom, you will be able to immediately listen to it, add
it to a playlist, or continue shopping.
Playing Music
ᮣ The Sprint Music tab of the Home screen allows you to play the song that you purchased and downloaded
Receiving an Incoming Call While Playing Music
An incoming call causes the currently played music file to be paused while the phone call is active. Once
the current call is ended, you can select to resume any paused applications. (Music will resume playing
automatically.)
1. When you receive an incoming call, tap Answer on the Phone screen.
2. When you are done with your call, tap End Call on the Phone screen or press the End key to end the call.
The previously paused application then resumes.
Backing Up Your Downloaded Music Files
Sprint recommends you back up your downloaded music files to your computer. Although the downloaded
files can only be played on your device and on your account, backing them up to your computer lets you
access the files in case your microSD card is lost or damaged, or if you install a new microSD card.
1. Use your computer to navigate to the Music folder of your device (that is, go to this path: \Music).
If you downloaded the music files to the microSD card, go to \Storage Card.
Note
2. Select and copy the music files to a folder on your computer’s hard drive.
Although you can store purchased and downloaded music files on your computer, they will only be playable on
your device and on your account.
Note
172
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Streaming Media
Streaming Media lets you stream live broadcasts or on-demand media content from the Web. The media is
sent in a continuous stream to your device and is played as it arrives, along with the audio.
The Streaming Media program allows you to play 3GP and MPEG-4 files. It also supports playback of SDP
(Session Description Protocol) files.
To access streaming content via the Web browser:
In a Web browser such as Opera Mobile, you can open a Web page containing RTSP (Real Time Streaming
Protocol) links to streaming media content then play the content in the Streaming Media program.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab, and then tap Browser.
2. In the address bar, enter the URL address of the Web page that contains the RTSP link to the desired
*.3gp, *.mp4, or *.sdp file.
3. On the Web page, tap the RTSP link.
4. Streaming Media then automatically opens and starts playing the file. During playback, use the button
controls to play or pause the stream, switch to full-screen mode, rewind, and fast forward.
To stream media files directly on the Streaming Media Player:
Streaming Media only supports RTSP links when you stream *.3gp and *.mp4 files directly on the program.
Before you launch the Streaming Media program, make sure that you are connected to the Internet.
Note
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Streaming Media.
2. From the program, tap Menu > Connect.
3. Enter the address for the website (rtsp://) and the file name.
4. Tap Connect.
5. Streaming Media then starts playing the file. During playback, use the onscreen button controls to play or
pause the stream, switch to full-screen mode, rewind, and fast forward.
To view streaming video information:
ᮣ Tap Menu > Properties to view the properties and general information of a streaming video clip, such as
video codec, audio codec, dimension, frames, and duration of the video.
To configure streaming video connection settings:
ᮣ Tap Menu > Options to configure the Streaming Media settings. You can set the media buffer, select the
connection to use, and set all streaming videos to play in full screen.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
173
YouTube
YouTube™ lets you browse, search, and watch video clips from the YouTube server.
You need an active connection to use YouTube. If you are using a data connection, your data connection bill may
increase significantly due to large file sizes of the videos.
Note
To open YouTube:
ᮣ From the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab and then tap YouTube.
– or –
Tap Start > All Programs > YouTube.
Introducing the YouTube Screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Program Guide. Tap to open the Program Guide list. The Program Guide list only appears if you are
subscribed to a channel.
2. Channel. Displays the current program channel being viewed.
3. Settings. Tap to set the quality of downloaded videos and site (country) preference.
4. Filter. Tap to filter the list by type of video (Featured, Most Viewed, Top Favorited, or Top Rated) and by the
time period when videos were uploaded to the YouTube server.
5. Video List. Displays the available videos for the selected program channel. Tap a video to watch it.
Tap
to view details about the video.
6. Tabs. Tap these tabs to switch between the different YouTube screens: Bookmarks, History and Search.
174
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Searching Videos
1. On the YouTube screen, tap
.
2. On the Search screen, enter the video information and then tap Search.
YouTube searches for the video, and then displays all related videos on the screen.
3. Tap a video to play it.
Using the Program Guide
The Program Guide categorizes videos into channels so you can browse and watch related videos available
on YouTube. You can also add your favorite video channel in the Program Guide.
To add a new channel:
1. Search the channel or video you want to add to the Program Guide. See “Searching Videos” for details.
2. In the search results list, tap
3. Tap and then tap OK on the confirmation screen.
The channel you just subscribed to will now be shown when you tap Program Guide.
at the right side of the video or channel to open the details screen.
You can also add a search information as a program channel.
Tip
To change the program channel:
1. On the Videos screen, tap Program Guide at the top of the screen.
2. On the Program Guide menu, scroll through the available channels and then select a channel.
The video list refreshes to display the available videos for the newly selected channel.
To delete a program channel:
You can only delete program channels that you have added to the Program Guide.
1. Tap Program Guide at the top of the screen.
2. Scroll down to the channel you want to delete and then tap
.
3. On the confirmation screen, tap Yes.
Watching Videos
Tap a video on any YouTube tab, program guide channel, or search results list to play the video.
To adjust the playback volume, press the Volume Up or Volume Down button on the left panel of the device.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
175
Bookmarks
You can save frequently viewed videos to Bookmarks for quick access.
To view Bookmarks:
ᮣ On the YouTube screen, tap
. Tap a video to watch it.
To add a video into Bookmarks:
ᮣ After watching a video, tap
.
– or –
On the list of videos, tap
on the video you want to add to Bookmarks and then tap Bookmark.
To delete a video from Bookmarks:
1. On the Bookmarks screen, tap Edit.
2. Tap
on the video you want to remove from Bookmarks.
3. On the confirmation screen, tap Yes.
4. Tap Done.
History
View recently watched videos on the History screen. On the YouTube screen, tap
to watch it.
and then tap a video
To clear the History list, tap Clear.
176
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
NASCAR Sprint Cup MobileSm keeps all NASCAR related information in one convenient location on your device
and enables you to personalize the content with your favorite driver. When you are away from the track, you
can follow races via streaming MRN/PRN race broadcast coverage and in-car audio. NASCAR Sprint Cup
Mobile delivers real-time, race-day statistics and telemetry from all 43 NASCAR Sprint Cup Series™ drivers
and offers video on demand from NASCAR.com, SPEED and more.
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile provides the following features:
ⅷ Personalize the program view to track your favorite driver
ⅷ Live MRN/PRN race broadcasts
ⅷ Live driver/team audio communications
ⅷ Real-time race-day statistics and telemetry for all 43 NASCAR Sprint Cup Series drivers
ⅷ 24-hour access to breaking NASCAR Sprint Cup Series news including insight and analysis from
industry experts
ⅷ Delivers race and qualifying results including NASCAR Sprint Cup Series points standings and
season statistics
ⅷ Offers video on demand from NASCAR.com, SPEED programming and more
While using this program, incoming calls may go directly to voicemail.
Note
Using NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the First Time
When you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the first time, it will prompt you to specify your favorite
NASCAR driver.
1. Tap Start > Nascar Mobile.
2. On the welcome screen, tap the Car# or Driver name box. On the subsequent screen, enter your favorite
NASCAR car number or driver name and then tap OK. Tap Go to continue.
– or –
You can also tap Select from a list..., select a NASCAR driver, and then tap ok.
3. A message is then displayed, confirming whether to add your favorite NASCAR driver to your My Drivers
list. Tap YES to add.
4. If there are subsequent screens that are displayed, read the messages on the screens and select your
preferences. Tap ok to proceed to the NASCAR Home screen.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
177
The NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile Home Screen
Whenever you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile, the NASCAR Home screen will be displayed, showing
your favorite NASCAR driver banner with statistics. Swipe your finger upward to scroll down the screen and
browse through more content.
1
2
3
1. Driver banner. Shows your favorite NASCAR driver with key statistics. Tap the banner to view the
driver profile.
2. Drawer. Information on the NASCAR Home screen is organized into several drawers. When a drawer is
open, it shows a down arrow at the right side of the drawer. Tap to close the drawer. To view information
in another drawer, tap the drawer to open it.
3. Ticker. Shows breaking news ticker.
The NASCAR Home screen looks different on race days and non-race days below the driver banner.
Note
The Menu Bar
Tap MENU at the bottom-right side of the screen to display the Menu Bar and access more features of the
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile.
Menu
Bar
Navigating the Menu Bar
1. Drag your finger left or right across the Menu Bar to scroll through the available feature.
2. Tap an icon to select it and display the corresponding information.
178
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Menu Bar Icons
Icon
Description
Home
Returns you to the NASCAR Home screen.
Displays your favorite driver’s profile, season and race statistics, news
and downloads.
My Driver
Displays current driver and racing news as well editorial and recent
race photos.
News
Includes race results, point standings, and season statistics. The
NASCAR season schedule is included here as well.
Stats & Schedules
NASCAR on SPEED
Audio/Video
Sprint FanZone
Fantasy
View live SPEED programming or recorded video.
Gives you access to the most recent NASCAR video and audio clips.
Learn about the latest Sprint promotions, and see the recent winners in
the Sprint All-Star Sweepstakes.
View NASCAR Fantasy league-related articles and videos.
Allows you to:
ⅷ Change your primary favorite driver
ⅷ Add or delete any of the four secondary favorite drivers
ⅷ Subscribe and unsubscribe to free Sprint Cup SMS text alerts
ⅷ Set your default in-car audio
Alerts &
Personalization
Help
Exit
Displays the NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile Help.
When you want to close the program, select Exit, and then tap YES.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
179
NFL Mobile Live
NFL Mobile Live keeps you up to date on all NFL (National Football League) games and information while you
are on the go. Using NFL Mobile Live, you can watch and listen to live video, hear the latest scores, get alerts,
and customize the program to track your favorite team.
While using this program, incoming calls may go directly to voicemail.
Note
Using NFL Mobile Live for the First Time
When you open NFL Mobile Live for the first time, it will prompt you to choose your favorite NFL team.
1. Tap Start > NFL Mobile.
2. On the startup screen, tap Continue.
3. On the subsequent screens, choose your favorite NFL team, and then tap ok.
The NFL Central Screen
Whenever you open NFL Mobile Live, the NFL Central screen will be displayed, providing listings of league-
wide news, top videos and articles, access to NFL blogs, and more. Swipe your finger upward to scroll down
the screen and browse through more content.
Information on the NFL Central screen is organized into several drawers. Tap a drawer, for instance, Around
the NFL, to close it. To view information in another drawer, tap the drawer to open it.
Drawers
The Menu Bar
Tap MENU at the bottom-right side of the screen to display the Menu Bar and access more features of the
NFL Mobile Live.
Menu
Bar
180
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
Navigating the Menu Bar
1. Drag your finger left or right across the Menu Bar to scroll through the available feature.
2. Tap an icon to select it and display the corresponding information.
Menu Bar Icons
Icon
Description
NFL Central
Returns you to the NFL Central screen.
Allows you to view content from the live TV broadcast of the NFL
Network and view various On Demand clips, including Total Access.
You can also view the NFL Network channel broadcast schedule to
see when your favorite show will be on.
NFL Network
My Team
Lets you stay on top of the latest news and videos for your favorite
team. You can also view your team statistics, photos, schedules and
results, standings, and more.
Allows you to manage your fantasy team, and also offers articles,
videos and analysis to keep you informed on the hottest players
Fantasy
Teams & Standings
Lets you check the standings for both the AFC and NFC.
Allows you to view the season schedule week by week. Press the
navigation key left or right to move from week to week, and press the
Enter key while highlighting a game to go to the Game Center focused
on that match up
Scores & Schedules
News & Photos
Presents a large number of League news articles, feature articles, as
well as transaction news. It also contains a photo gallery with images
from recent games. Select a Photo Gallery title to see the images
contained within.
Collects videos that are spread throughout the application all into one
location. Here, you can view content such as Fantasy videos, Game
highlights, and even Can't Miss Plays.
Audio & Video
Statistics
Lets you view various stats like Weekly Leaders and League Leaders.
You can also use the Team stats and Player stats sections to search for
any team or player to quickly bring up their statistics.
Allows you to change your Favorite team, and view all the alerts you've
received today. In the sections below, you can also set and manage
your Game Alerts, Team alerts, Fantasy alerts and Player alerts.
Alerts &
Personalization
Help
Exit
Displays the NFL Mobile Live Help.
When you want to close the program, select Exit, and then tap YES.
Section 3C. Entertainment: TV and Music
181
Section 3D
GPS Navigation
Use your device’s built-in GPS capabilities and the Sprint Navigation software to easily access both directional information
and location-specific features such as nearby businesses, services or other points of interest. Sprint Navigation also
provides turn-by-turn driving directions onscreen and by voice right on your device.
Guidelines and Preparation for Using GPS
Please follow these guidelines before and when using your device as a GPS device.
ⅷ Do not attempt to set or adjust the GPS system while driving.
ⅷ When using the device inside a vehicle, use the car holder to mount the device securely in place. Avoid
placing the device in the areas shown in the following diagram:
1. Do not place where it will block the driver’s vision.
2. Do not place where air bags could deploy.
3. Do not place anywhere in the vehicle without securing the device in the holder.
ⅷ The GPS signal cannot pass through solid non-transparent objects. Signal reception may be affected by
obstructions such as high-rise buildings, tunnels, bridges, forests, and weather conditions. Even metal in
the overhead visors could block GPS reception.
ⅷ Wireless communication products (such as mobile phones or radar-detecting devices) may interfere with
the satellite signal, resulting in unstable signal reception.
ⅷ The Global Positioning System (GPS) is maintained by the United States Department of Defense. Any
changes that the DOD makes may affect the accuracy and function of the GPS system.
ⅷ Do not leave your device in a vehicle or expose the device to direct sunlight to avoid overheating the
battery, which could cause damage to the device or the vehicle.
182
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
Downloading Satellite Data via QuickGPS
Before you start using your device for GPS navigation, open the QuickGPS program first to download
ephemeris data (current satellite position and timing information) to your device. QuickGPS downloads data
from a Web server using the Internet connection on your device (Wi-Fi, ActiveSync, or data services). This
significantly speeds up the time for determining your GPS position.
To open QuickGPS:
ᮣ Tap Start > All Programs > QuickGPS.
To download data:
ᮣ Tap Download on the QuickGPS screen.
You will initially see onscreen the Valid time of the downloaded data. As time passes, the remaining days and
hours of validity will be shown.
To speed up GPS positioning, download the latest ephemeris data when the validity of the data expires.
Download Options
To configure download times, tap Menu > Options and choose from the available options:
ⅷ Remind me when data expires. Enables your device to display a reminder message when the validity of the
ephemeris data has expired. When you see the reminder message, tap Menu to dismiss the reminder or to
set the snooze time so that you will be reminded again. Tap OK to open the QuickGPS program and
download the latest data.
ⅷ Auto download when data expires. Allows ephemeris data to be automatically updated onto your device when
the data has expired.
ⅷ Auto download when connected to PC via ActiveSync. Allows ephemeris data to be automatically downloaded
via ActiveSync to your device when your device is connected to your computer. Your computer must be
connected to the Internet in order to download data.
ⅷ Exit QuickGPS after downloading. Closes QuickGPS after satellite data is downloaded.
The data is stored on Web servers. QuickGPS is preconfigured to connect to these servers.
Note
Using Sprint Navigation
Sprint Navigation™ utilizes GPS positioning technology and access to Sprint’s wireless data network to provide
you with driving directions and a host of other services including:
ⅷ GPS navigation that gives you turn-by-turn directions to any destination address in the continental United
States. If you miss a turn or get off track, Sprint Navigation will calculate a new route for you. You can
enter a destination address by using Sprint Navigation’s automatic voice recognition system or by typing
on the your device’s onscreen keypad.
ⅷ Audio and visual traffic alerts while driving or viewing maps, as well as traffic rerouting capabilities to
minimize delays.
ⅷ Maps of the area around your current location, a marked Favorite, or an address you enter manually or
have previously entered. You can pan the map (adjust left/right/up/down) and zoom in or out.
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
183
Using Sprint Navigation for the First Time
1. To launch Sprint Navigation on your device, slide to the Navigation tab on the Home screen and then tap
any of the four icons on the screen.
2. You will see a splash screen for a few seconds and then the terms of service. Read through the terms,
and then tap Accept after you have viewed the information.
3. Type in your phone number, first name, last name, and email address, and then tap Go. Sprint Navigation
will then allow you to log into the service.
4. You will then see a safety warning. If you agree to the conditions listed, tap Go.
5. Tap Back at the bottom-left side of the screen to display the Sprint Navigation main screen.
Using Sprint Navigation
The Main Screen
After logging into Sprint Navigation, you will be taken to the application’s main screen.
184
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
ⅷ Drive To lets you get driving directions by address, recently entered locations, airport code or business
name.
ⅷ Search provides you with different ways to provide the addresses and phone numbers of banks,
restaurants, gas stations, emergency services, and other hard to find locations.
ⅷ Maps & Traffic allows you to view map and traffic information for your current location, favorite places, a
business, specific addresses, and more.
ⅷ Share & More gives you more options. You can share an address, record a location, set preferences,
and more.
Entering an Address
With Sprint Navigation, there are two ways to enter an address – by typing it or by speaking it. To access the
address entry menu, tap Drive To and then tap Address. You will then see the following options:
ⅷ Type It allows you to enter a street address by typing it in the appropriate fields.
1. On the Address screen, tap Type It.
2. Enter the street name. You may type in a partial entry (five or more letters) for the street name.
You can always leave the street address field blank and type in a city to perform a city search. The City and
State fields have an auto-fill feature, so you usually will not have to type in the whole name of the city or state.
Note
3. Tap Done to submit the address.
To quickly clear the fields, choose Options > Clear All on the address screen.
Note
4. Sprint Navigation checks to see if the address you entered can be found. Sprint Navigation prompts
you to modify the address if it is too new to be found in the mapping database or if the street number
cannot be found for some other reason.
After submitting the address, you will be taken to the trip confirmation street and you are ready to
begin your trip.
ⅷ Speak It allows you to enter a street address by calling in and dictating the address.
1. On the Address screen, tap Speak It.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter your destination address.
3. After a successful entry, hang up and you will be taken back to the screen you were viewing prior to
making the call. The location you just entered will now be displayed at the top of your Recent Places
list. You may need to tap Refresh Recent Places to make the address available.
You should now have a basic understanding of how to enter an address and get driving directions. For
more information about using Sprint Navigation, visit the support page at http://www.sprint.com/navigation.
The Sprint Navigation software gets routing directions, maps, and its directory of businesses and points of
interests from the Sprint Navigation servers. You need to subscribe to a data plan in order to access this
information. If you do not have a data plan yet, check Sprint Navigation’s website at http://www.sprint.com/
navigation for subscription rates.
Note
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
185
Windows Live Search
Windows Live™ Search is a separate program that offers you a fast and easy way to find and view maps and
local information on your device.
With Windows Live Search, you can:
ⅷ Browse through local listings of categories.
ⅷ Locate nearby restaurants, shopping centers, etc., and check for street addresses and phone numbers.
ⅷ View maps with directions to and from a location.
ⅷ View traffic information.
To open Live Search:
1. Tap Start > Live Search.
2. The first time you launch Live Search, you will be asked to read the Service Agreement,. If you agree with
the terms of service, tap Accept., and then tap OK on the subsequent screen.
You may be prompted to install an update for Live Search. Tap Yes to install the update
Note
To find a location:
1. Specify first where the location is near to. You can select from the list of cities.
You can also tap Choose a new location to enter a city, select on a map, or get a contact’s address. Tap OK
when done.
2. Enter the location that you want to find, and then tap Search.
You can also speak out the location name. Tap Speak and say the name clearly.
Tip
3. The Search Results screen then shows a list of matched places. Browse through the list. As you browse,
the address, phone number, and estimated distance of a selected item are displayed.
4. Tap the desired location on the Search Results screen.
186
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
5. On the Details screen:
● Tap Map to see the location on a map.
● Tap Directions to Here for instructions on how to reach the location.
● Tap Search Near Here to find addresses, businesses, or other places of interest near the location.
Section 3D. GPS Navigation
187
Section 3E
Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Your device allows you to roam throughout the world using both CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) and GSM (Global
System for Mobile Communications) networks. For a complete list of countries and features available, visit
www.sprint.com/sww.
To use Sprint international roaming services, you must be a current Sprint subscriber. You must also meet
international toll authorization and credit requirements to roam in most places outside of the United States.
Depending on your overseas location and coverage, you may not have access to all features. Service may be
interrupted if you change phones or phone numbers before traveling abroad.
Note
Your SIM Card
Your device comes with a preinstalled SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card to support roaming on
compatible GSM networks. The SIM card must be activated for international wireless service prior to its initial
use (outside of the United States).
To activate Sprint Worldwide service:
ᮣ Visit www.sprint.com/international.
● Click Chat with us to talk online with a Sprint representative
– or –
● Click Email us to send an email to a Sprint representative
– or –
ᮣ Call 1-888-226-7212, option 2, to speak to a Sprint representative.
For more help with Sprint Worldwide international setup, tap Start > All Programs , scroll down the All Programs
screen, and then tap International Usage to display a brief set of onscreen GSM setup instructions.
Your SIM card should be preinstalled. If you need to reinstall your SIM card, see “Removing Your SIM Card” on
page 189. The SIM card included with your device contains information specific to your device and should be
retained with the device for use on GSM networks.
Note
188
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Removing Your SIM Card
The SIM card comes preinstalled but can be removed if necessary.
1. Remove the back cover.
Ⅲ Remove the stylus. (You need to temporarily remove the stylus to be able to remove the back cover.)
Ⅲ Hold the device with both hands and the front panel facing down.
Ⅲ Push the back cover up with your thumb until it disengages from the device and then slide it up
to remove.
2. Remove the battery if it is installed. To remove, lift out the battery from the groove at the upper right side
of the battery compartment.
Groove
3. To remove the SIM card, first insert the tip of the stylus into the small hole above the SIM card slot, and
then push the SIM card out with the stylus. Slide the SIM card out from the slot with your thumb or finger.
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
189
4. Press the Power button to turn the device on.
Ⅲ Your device will turn on, search for Sprint service, and then enter standby mode.
Ⅲ By default, your device is set to Global mode. If there is no SIM card on your device, your device will
display a message to inform you that it will switch to CDMA mode.
Your device’s battery should have enough charge to turn on, find a signal, set up your voicemail, and make a call.
You should fully charge your battery as soon as possible. See “Charging the Battery” on page 13 for details.
Note
Using Your Device in GSM Mode
Sprint offers service on CDMA and GSM networks around the world; contact Sprint Worldwide Customer Service
before your trip to confirm that your service allows for international dialing. In countries where CDMA service is not
available you will need access to a GSM network.
Note
Entering GSM Mode
By default, your device operates in Global mode. With a SIM card installed, Global mode allows your device
to seamlessly switch from a CDMA network to a GSM network when you are traveling in another country and
there is no CDMA service available in your location.
If necessary, you can also manually change the network mode setting of your device to GSM-only mode.
To change the network mode to GSM:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Phone Network Mode.
2. From the Mode of operation list, select GSM only.
3. Tap ok.
While in the United States, your device will operate only in CDMA mode; domestic GSM networks will not be
accessible via this device.
Note
Making and Answering Calls in GSM Mode
When traveling on international GSM networks while in GSM mode, you can place and answer calls the
same as in CDMA mode. See “Using Phone Features” on page 57. Certain features and services are not
available in all countries.
Visit www.sprint.com/sww for more information on services that are available while roaming.
Calling Emergency Numbers in GSM Mode
When traveling on international GSM networks while in GSM mode, you can place calls to emergency
services (even if your account is restricted or Call Barring is active.)
To place calls to emergency services:
1. Press the Talk key to open the Phone screen.
2. Tap
.
190
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Plus (+) Code Dialing and Global Smart Dialing
Placing calls from one country to another country is simple with the Plus Code Dialing. When you place
international calls, Plus Code Dialing automatically fills in the international access code for your location (for
example, 011 for international calls placed from the United States).
When the Global Smart Dialing feature is enabled, you can preconfigure the country to call. Plus Code
Dialing also becomes automatic when you use Global Smart Dialing. You simply enter the 10-digit number
when placing your international call. Both the “+” symbol and country code will automatically be prepended
to the number.
Configuring Global Smart Dialing in GSM Mode
1. Press the Talk key to open the Phone screen.
2. Tap Menu, scroll down the menu, and then tap Global Smart Dialing.
3. Select the Enable Global Smart Dialing check box.
4. Select the country to which you are calling from the Dial to list. The corresponding country code will
appear in the Country Code box. (You cannot change the country code.)
5. Tap Done.
Using Plus Code Dialing with Global Smart Dialing in GSM Mode
1. On the Phone screen, directly enter the 10-digit number to call. This number includes the area code
(without the leading zero, if any) and phone number.
2. Tap
on the Phone screen or press the Talk key to place the call.
(The Phone screen will then display the complete number, including the “+” symbol followed by the
country code and the 10-digit number. The “+” symbol automatically inserts the access code for
international dialing.)
When Global Smart Dialing is not enabled, you need to manually enter the “+” symbol and the country code of
the person you are calling. Tap and hold to enter the “+” symbol, and then enter the country code,
followed by the city or area code and the phone number.
Note
Direct Dial in GSM Mode
When the number you want to call (area code and phone number) contains fewer than 10 digits, you need to use
direct dialing to place international calls.
Note
To use direct dialing to place an international call:
ᮣ Enter the international access code, the country code, the city or area code, and the phone number, and
then tap
to complete the call.
Making Calls Within a Country (Local or Long Distance Dialing)
The steps for making an international call within the same country are identical to those for calling country-
to-country, except it is not necessary to enter the country code.
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
191
Calling the United States from Another Country in GSM Mode
To place a call to the United States from another country:
Global Smart Dialing, making sure to select the United States in step 4 of that sequence.
2. On the Phone screen, enter the area code without the leading zero, followed by the number of the person
you are calling. (The area code and phone number should total 10 digits.)
3. Tap
on the Phone screen or press the Talk key to place the call.
(The “+” symbol and U.S. country code are automatically prepended to the dialed number. Also, the “+”
symbol automatically inserts the exit code for the country from which you are calling.)
When Global Smart Dialing is not enabled, you need to manually enter the “+” symbol and the U.S. country code
to place the call. Tap and hold to enter the “+” symbol, tap to insert the U.S. country code, and
then enter the city or area code followed by the phone number.
Note
Calling Other Countries in GSM Mode
To place a call from one country to another country:
2. On the Phone screen, enter the complete local number according to the dialing sequence used by the
country to which you are calling. For instance, the standard dialing sequence used in many countries
comprises the area code without the leading zero, followed by the phone number. (The complete local
number should total 10 digits.)
3. Tap
on the Phone screen or press the Talk key to place the call.
(The “+” symbol and country code are automatically prepended to the dialed number. Also, the “+”
symbol automatically inserts the exit code for the country from which you are calling.)
When Global Smart Dialing is not enabled, you need to manually enter the “+” symbol and the country code of
the person you are calling. Tap and hold to enter the “+” symbol, and then enter the country code,
followed by the city or area code and the phone number.
Note
Retrieving Voicemail Messages
Your device uses the same Voicemail box for both Sprint CDMA and GSM modes.
To retrieve voicemail messages:
1. Enter the international access code (or if in GSM mode, tap and hold
until a “+” symbol appears
on the Phone screen).
2. Enter
followed by your 10-digit phone number.
3. When you hear the voice greeting, tap
and enter your password, followed by
.
International Data Roaming
Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service can also keep you connected via email and Web browsing when
traveling in countries in which Sprint offers data service. Data services are available on both CDMA and
GSM networks; check www.sprint.com/international to determine the services available where you are traveling.
Prior to using your Sprint Worldwide GSM Data Services, you must establish and utilize your CDMA data services
domestically on the Nationwide Sprint Network.
Note
192
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Getting Started with Data Services
Before you can use Sprint Worldwide Data Services, you must first have these services activated on your
account.
ᮣ To activate, visit www.sprint.com/international.
● Click Chat with us to talk online with an International Services representative.
– or –
● Click Email us to send an email to an International Services representative.
– or –
Call 1-888-226-7212, option 2, to speak with an International Services representative.
Once your services are activated, you may need to select a GSM data services provider for the country
you’re in. (See “Selecting a Network” on page 200.)
Accessing Your Email and Data Services on CDMA Networks
Since your device is set to Global mode by default, it automatically detects CDMA networks. If a data
service is available on a CDMA network, you do not need to manually set your device to CDMA mode.
You also do not need to select the specific carrier. Selecting a specific carrier is necessary only for
providers on the GSM network.
If you changed the network mode setting of your device to GSM-only mode while you are traveling, you
need to set it back to Global mode or CDMA-only mode to access CDMA data services.
To change the network mode from GSM to Global or CDMA-only mode:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Phone Network Mode.
2. From the Mode of operation drop-down list, select Global or CDMA only.
3. Tap ok.
Visit www.sprint.com/international for a list of services available for each country.
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
193
Using Your SIM Card’s PhoneBook
Your SIM card contains its own phone book that is separate from your device’s internal Contacts list. You can
update and maintain the SIM PhoneBook whenever your SIM card is installed on your device, even if you are
not in a GSM service area.
When saving a Contacts entry to your SIM card, note that only the name and number are saved. Entries
stored on the card do not contain any detailed information that may be stored in the device's internal
memory. To store additional information for a particular contact, such as email addresses or dates, it is
important to save that information to your device’s onboard memory.
When a SIM card is active, the All Contacts screen that can be accessed from the TouchFLO 3D People tab
will then display two types of entries:
Contacts entry — SIM card
Contacts entry — Phone
Each Contacts entry stored on the SIM card can use only one phone number, and the entry’s name can be
a maximum of 12 characters.
Adding Entries to the SIM PhoneBook
There are two ways to add new entries to your SIM card’s phonebook. You can add contact entries using the
Windows Mobile Contacts program or the SIM Manager.
Adding Entries Using Windows Mobile Contacts
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts.
2. On the Contacts screen, tap New, and then tap SIM Contact.
4. Tap ok.
Adding Entries Using SIM Manager
1. Tap Start > All Programs > SIM Manager and then tap New.
3. Tap Save.
194
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Copying Contacts Entries to the SIM PhoneBook
You can also copy entries from your device’s Contacts to your SIM PhoneBook using either Windows Mobile
Contacts or the SIM Manager.
Copying Entries Using Windows Mobile Contacts
1. Tap Start > All Programs > Contacts.
2. Tap Menu, scroll down the menu, and then tap Select Contacts. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Tap All to select all contacts.
– or –
Ⅲ Tap Several, and then in the contacts list, select only those contacts that you want to copy to the SIM
Phonebook.
3. Tap Menu > Copy Contact and then select a copy option:
Ⅲ To SIM to copy the selected contacts from your device to your SIM card. Note that only the name and
number will be saved to the card.
Ⅲ To Contacts to copy the selected contacts from your SIM Card to your device's onboard memory.
Copying Entries Using SIM Manager
To copy contacts to the SIM card:
When you copy a contact that has several phone numbers to your SIM card, SIM Manager automatically
saves each number as a separate entry on the SIM card. Each entry shows the same contact name but with
an indicator appended at the end of the name. By default, /M, /W, and /H are appended to indicate mobile,
work, and home phone numbers respectively.
To edit the default indicators and to select which other types of numbers to save to the SIM card, tap Menu >
Tools > Options and change the indicators.
Tip
1. Tap Start > All Programs > SIM Manager.
2. Tap Menu > Contacts to SIM.
3. The check boxes of all available phone numbers stored on your device are selected. Clear the check
boxes of those phone numbers that you do not want to copy to your SIM card.
4. Tap Save.
To copy SIM contacts to your device:
If you have saved contacts on your SIM card, you can copy them to the contacts list on your device.
1. Tap Start > All Programs > SIM Manager.
2. On the SIM Manager screen, you can:
Ⅲ Select all SIM contacts by tapping Menu > Select All.
– or –
Ⅲ Open the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard, and use the Up or Down key of the
keyboard to highlight and select a SIM contact.
3. Tap Menu > Save to Contacts.
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
195
Deleting SIM PhoneBook Entries
Use the SIM Manager to delete some or all SIM PhoneBook entries.
To delete some entries from the SIM Phonebook:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > SIM Manager.
2. Tap Menu > Delete Contacts.
3. Select the check boxes of the entries that you want to delete from the SIM Phonebook.
4. Tap Delete.
To delete all SIM Phonebook entries:
1. Tap Start > All Programs > SIM Manager.
2. Tap Menu > Select All.
3. Tap Menu > Delete.
Copying Text Messages to the SIM Card
When your SIM card is installed on your device, you can save text messages to your SIM card.
1. From the Home screen, slide to the Messages tab and then tap All Messages.
2. In the SMS / MMS inbox, tap a message thread.
3. The exchange of text messages between you and the sender is then displayed. Open the sliding
QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard, and use the Up or Down key of the keyboard to highlight
the text message that you want to copy to the SIM card.
4. Tap Menu > Copy to SIM.
• You cannot copy a sent text message from the thread to the SIM card.
Notes
• Copying text messages from your device to the SIM card results in duplicate messages when you are viewing
the Inbox.
196
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Setting GSM Services Options
There are several user options available for GSM operation under your device’s Phone settings. All these
options require that your device be in Global or GSM-only mode and in a GSM roaming coverage area.
(See www.sprint.com/sww for a list of countries where international GSM coverage is available, and see
To configure GSM services options:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. Tap the Personal tab, and then tap Phone > GSM/UMTS Services tab.
3. Tap the service you want to configure and then tap Get Settings.
4. Choose your desired options, and then tap ok.
The following are some of the GSM services that you can configure.
GSM Services
Call Barring
Usage
Allows you to block certain types of incoming and outgoing calls on your
device. This would be useful, for example if you allowed someone to use
your device for a short period of time. (See “Using Call Barring (GSM)”
below for details.)
Caller ID
Call Waiting
Allows you to enable or disable call waiting. (See “Call Waiting” on page
199 for details.)
Call Forwarding
Allows you to divert incoming calls to another specified phone number.
Voice Mail and Text
Messages
Shows the text messages service center phone number and your voicemail
number for accessing voicemail messages when you are roaming on GSM
Location Setting
TTY Mode
Allows the GSM network to detect your current location via your device’s
built-in GPS chip. This is especially useful in emergencies.
Allows the use of a TTY (teletypewriter) with the device for users who are
visually or hearing impaired. The available modes are the same as in CDMA.
Time Synchronization
Allows you to choose whether to synchronize the time on your device with
the GSM network.
Using Call Barring (GSM)
To activate Call Barring (GSM):
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. Tap the Personal tab and then tap Phone > GSM/UMTS Services tab.
3. Tap Call Barring and then tap Get Settings.
4. Under Block incoming calls and Block outgoing calls, choose when you want to block phone calls.
5. Tap ok.
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
197
Contacting Sprint
Sprint Worldwide Customer Service is available to answer your questions 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Visit www.sprint.com/international and click Chat with us to talk online with an International Services
representative; or click Email us to send an email to an International Services representative; or you can call
the numbers below if you need assistance.
While in the United States:
ᮣ Call 1-888-226-7212, option 2.
While traveling outside the United States:
ᮣ Call +1-817-698-4199, option 2.
There is no charge for this call from your Sprint wireless device.
From a landline phone when outside the United States:
Sprint Worldwide Customer Service can be reached from a landline phone at +1-817-698-4199, option 2.
Access or connection fees may apply. The toll-free numbers below can also be used to contact Sprint
Worldwide Customer Service in the following countries.
Country
From Landline Phone
1-888-226-7212
1-888-226-7212
1-888-226-7212
1-888-226-7212
0800-903200
Anguilla
Barbados
Cayman Islands
Dominican Republic
France
Germany
0800-180-0951
800-787-986
Italy
Mexico
001-877-294-9003
1-800-201-7545
0808-234-6616
Trinidad and Tobago
United Kingdom
This toll-free service is available through ordinary landline phones and some public payphones. Additional fees
may be incurred if you call this service from hotels.
Note
198
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Services
Caller ID
Caller ID displays the number (and name, if in your PhoneBook) of incoming calls. Caller ID in GSM mode
must be enabled by the user.
To enable or disable caller ID:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. Tap the Personal tab and then tap Phone > GSM/UMTS Services tab.
3. Tap Caller ID and then tap Get Settings.
4. Select Everyone, No one, or Only to contacts and tap ok.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting notifies you of an incoming call even while you’re in a call. You can then accept, reject, or ignore
the incoming call. Unlike Call Waiting in CDMA mode, Call Waiting in GSM mode must first be activated.
To use Call Waiting Internationally:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. Tap the Personal tab and then tap Phone > GSM/UMTS Services tab.
3. Tap Call Waiting and then tap Get Settings.
4. Select the Notify me option and tap ok.
Voicemail and Text Messages
To activate voicemail settings:
1. Tap Start > Settings > All Settings.
2. Tap the Personal tab and then tap Phone > GSM/UMTS Services tab.
3. Tap Voice Mail and Text Messages and then tap Get Settings.
4. The text messages service center number and your voicemail number are then displayed. To change the
voicemail number, open the sliding QWERTY keyboard or an onscreen keyboard, and then use the
keyboard to enter a new number.
5. Tap ok.
The voicemail number is automatically set up when you receive your device. You will probably not need to change
it unless otherwise instructed by your carrier.
Note
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
199
Selecting a Network
To access your email and browse the Web when traveling, you may need to manually select the carrier that
provides Sprint service in your location. You can find a list of carriers for each country where GSM data
service is offered at www.sprint.com/sww. Then, follow the instructions below to select the appropriate carrier
network on your device.
To select a GSM data service for a specific country:
1. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Phone Network Mode.
Ⅲ On the Network tab of the Phone settings screen, the Current Network field displays a description of the
currently active network.
2. From the GSM Network selection field, select Automatic or Manual.
3. Tap Find Network.
Ⅲ If you selected Automatic in step 2, the system will provide the best available network in your area and
then assign it to your device.
Ⅲ If you selected Manual in step 2, you will need to choose from the onscreen list of available networks
and then manually make the assignment.
Ⅲ Tap to highlight an available network and then tap OK. The settings are then sent to the network.
4. Tap ok to complete the process and save the new settings.
When traveling, it may be necessary to select a new compatible GSM data service carrier each time you enter a
new country.
Note
Viewing Your Preferred Networks
1. Tap Start > Settings > Menu > Phone Network Mode.
Ⅲ On the Network tab of the Phone settings screen, the Current Network field displays a description of the
currently active network.
2. From the GSM Network selection field, select Manual.
3. Tap Set Networks.
To add a new preferred network:
1. Repeat steps 1 - 3 from “Viewing Your Preferred Networks” to access the Phone: Preferred networks
screen.
2. Tap New Network.
3. Select Add a network from the list, browse through the available list, and then tap a network.
4. Tap ok. (This newly added network then appears on the Phone: Preferred networks screen.)
200
Section 3E. Sprint Worldwide Wireless Service
Section 4A
Important Safety Information
This User Guide contains important operational and safety information that will help you safely use your device. Failure to
read and follow the information provided in this guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property
damage.
Important Health Information and Safety Precautions
When using this product, the safety precautions below must be taken to avoid possible legal liabilities and
damages.
Retain and follow all product safety and operating instructions. Observe all warnings in the operating
instructions on the product.
To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire, and damage to the equipment, observe the following
precautions.
Electrical Safety
This product is intended for use when supplied with power from the designated battery or power supply unit.
Other usage may be dangerous and will invalidate any approval given to this product.
Safety Precautions for Proper Grounding Installation
CAUTION: Connecting to an improperly grounded equipment can result in an electric shock to your device.
This product equipped with a USB Cable for connecting with desktop or notebook computer. Be sure your
computer is properly grounded (earthed) before connecting this product to the computer. The power supply
cord of a desktop or notebook computer has an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug.
The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet which is properly installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
Safety Precautions for Power Supply Unit
ⅷ Use the correct external power source. A product should be operated only from the type of power source
indicated on the electrical ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of power source required, consult
your authorized service provider or local power company. For a product that operates from battery power
or other sources, refer to the operating instructions that are included with the product.
ⅷ Handle battery packs carefully. This product contains a Li-ion battery. There is a risk of fire and burns if
the battery pack is handled improperly. Do not attempt to open or service the battery pack. Do not
disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts or circuits, dispose of in fire or water, or expose a
battery pack to temperatures higher than 1400F (60oC).
202
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. To reduce risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble,
crush, puncture, short external contacts, expose to temperature above 600C (1400F), or dispose of in fire
or water. Replace only with specified batteries. Recycle or dispose of used batteries according to the local
regulations or reference guide supplied with your product.
WARNING
ⅷ Take extra precautions:
Ⅲ Keep the battery or device dry and away from water or any liquid as it may cause a short circuit.
Ⅲ Keep metal objects away so they don’t come in contact with the battery or its connectors as it may lead
to short circuit during operation.
Ⅲ The phone should be only connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the
USB-IF compliance program.
Ⅲ Do not use a battery that appears damaged, deformed, or discolored, or the one that has any rust on
its casing, overheats, or emits a foul odor.
Ⅲ Always keep the battery out of the reach of babies and small children, to avoid swallowing of the
battery. Consult the doctor immediately if the battery is swallowed.
Ⅲ Only use the battery with a charging system that has been qualified with the system per this standard,
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion,
leakage or other hazard.
Ⅲ Replace the battery only with another battery that has been qualified with the system per this standard,
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other
hazard.
Ⅲ Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface,
and the user suspects damage, take it to a service centre for inspection.
Ⅲ If the battery leaks:
● Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact with skin or clothing. If already in contact, flush the
affected area immediately with clean water and seek medical advice.
● Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact with eyes. If already in contact, DO NOT rub; rinse
with clean water immediately and seek medical advice.
● Take extra precautions to keep a leaking battery away from fire as there is a danger of ignition or
explosion.
Safety Precautions for Direct Sunlight
Keep this product away from excessive moisture and extreme temperatures. Do not leave the product or its
battery inside a vehicle or in places where the temperature may exceed 600C (1400F), such as on a car
dashboard, window sill, or behind a glass that is exposed to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet light for
extended periods of time. This may damage the product, overheat the battery, or pose a risk to the vehicle.
Prevention of Hearing Loss
CAUTION: Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for
prolonged periods of time.
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
203
Safety in Aircraft
Due to the possible interference caused by this product to an aircraft’s navigation system and its
communications network, using this device’s phone function on board an airplane is against the law in most
countries. If you want to use this device when on board an aircraft, remember to turn off your phone by
switching to Airplane Mode.
Environment Restrictions
Do not use this product in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in
progress, or in potentially explosive atmospheres such as fuelling areas, fuel storehouses, below deck on
boats, chemical plants, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains
chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Please be aware that sparks in such areas
could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.
Explosive Atmospheres
When in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere or where flammable materials exist, the product
should be turned off and the user should obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause
an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised not to use the equipment at
refueling points such as service or gas stations, and are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas
with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. These include fueling
areas, below deck on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains
chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
Road Safety
Vehicle drivers in motion are not permitted to use telephony services with handheld devices, except in the
case of emergency. In some countries, using hands-free devices as an alternative is allowed.
Safety Precautions for RF Exposure
ⅷ Avoid using your phone near metal structures (for example, the steel frame of a building).
ⅷ Avoid using your phone near strong electromagnetic sources, such as microwave ovens, sound speakers,
TV and radio.
ⅷ Use only original manufacturer-approved accessories, or accessories that do not contain any metal.
ⅷ Use of non-original manufacturer-approved accessories may violate your local RF exposure guidelines
and should be avoided.
Interference with Medical Equipment Functions
This product may cause medical equipment to malfunction. The use of this device is forbidden in most
hospitals and medical clinics.
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this
information.
Turn your phone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do
so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
204
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you
may want to consult your service provider, or call the customer service line to discuss alternatives.
Nonionizing Radiation
Your device has an internal antenna. This product should be operated in its normal-use position to ensure
the radiative performance and safety of the interference. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment,
users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is
recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during
operation of the equipment.
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Use of unauthorized or modified antennas may impair call quality
and damage the phone, causing loss of performance and SAR levels exceeding the recommended limits as
well as result in non-compliance with local regulatory requirements in your country.
To assure optimal phone performance and ensure human exposure to RF energy is within the guidelines set
forth in the relevant standards, always use your device only in its normal-use position. Contact with the
antenna area may impair call quality and cause your device to operate at a higher power level than needed.
Avoiding contact with the antenna area when the phone is IN USE optimizes the antenna performance and
the battery life.
Antenna
Location
General Precautions
ⅷ Avoid applying excessive pressure to the device. Do not apply excessive pressure on the screen and the
device to prevent damaging them and remove the device from your pants’ pocket before sitting down. It is
also recommended that you store the device in a protective case and only use the device stylus or your
finger when interacting with the touch screen. Cracked display screens due to improper handling are not
covered by the warranty.
ⅷ Device getting warm after prolonged use. When using your device for prolonged periods of time, such as
when you’re talking on the phone, charging the battery or browsing the Web, the device may become
warm. In most cases, this condition is normal and therefore should not be interpreted as a problem with
the device.
ⅷ Heed service markings. Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating or Service documentation, do
not service any product yourself. Service needed on components inside the device should be done by an
authorized service technician or provider.
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
205
ⅷ Damage requiring service. Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and refer servicing to an
authorized service technician or provider under the following conditions:
Ⅲ Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the product.
Ⅲ The product has been exposed to rain or water.
Ⅲ The product has been dropped or damaged.
Ⅲ There are noticeable signs of overheating.
Ⅲ The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions.
ⅷ Avoid hot areas. The product should be placed away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
ⅷ Avoid wet areas. Never use the product in a wet location.
ⅷ Avoid using your device after a dramatic change in temperature. When you move your device between
environments with very different temperature and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form on or within
the device. To avoid damaging the device, allow sufficient time for the moisture to evaporate before using
the device.
NOTICE: When taking the device from low-temperature conditions into a warmer environment or from
high-temperature conditions into a cooler environment, allow the device to acclimate to room
temperature before turning on power.
ⅷ Avoid pushing objects into product. Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings
in the product. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation. These openings must not be blocked or
covered.
ⅷ Mounting accessories. Do not use the product on an unstable table, cart, stand, tripod, or bracket. Any
mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting
accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
ⅷ Avoid unstable mounting. Do not place the product with an unstable base.
ⅷ Use product with approved equipment. This product should be used only with personal computers and
options identified as suitable for use with your equipment.
ⅷ Adjust the volume. Turn down the volume before using headphones or other audio devices.
ⅷ Cleaning. Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but NEVER use water to clean the LCD screen.
206
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
Additional Safety Information
This section provides more safety information in addition to the information at the beginning of the user
manual.
When Driving
Do Not Use The PC Functions Of Your Device While Driving Or Walking
Never use the personal computer functions of your device while driving an automobile or any other moving
vehicle. Always pull out of traffic and come to a stop in a legally permissible and safe location before using
your device. Failure to do so could result in serious bodily injury in a traffic accident.
When driving:
ⅷ Always secure your device in its leather pouch.
ⅷ Never place your device on the passenger seat or anyplace else in the car where it can become a
projectile during a collision or stop.
ⅷ An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including either installed or portable wireless
equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment
is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
Never store or transport flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment of your
automobile as the device or any of its accessories, as possible sparking in the device could cause ignition
or explosion.
Never use your device while walking. Usage while walking could result in bodily injury caused by inattention
to automobile traffic or other pedestrian hazards.
Using The Phone Function Of Your Device While Driving Is Extremely Dangerous
Talking on or using your device while driving is extremely dangerous and is illegal in some states.
Remember, safety comes first. Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the areas where you
drive. Always obey them.
If you must use the phone function while driving, please:
ⅷ Give full attention to driving. Driving safely is your first responsibility.
ⅷ Use hands-free operation and/or one-touch, speed dialing, and auto answer modes.
ⅷ Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call.
Failure to follow these instructions could lead to serious personal injury and possible property damage.
Warning
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
207
When Using Your Device Near Other Electronic Devices
Your wireless handheld portable device is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it
receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF energy. However, certain electronic equipment may
not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless device; therefore, use of your device must be
restricted in certain situations.
In addition, the computer portion of your device produces low levels of RF energy due to the generation of
digital timing pulses by its clock oscillator circuits. Your device has been equipped with internal shielding to
minimize stray emissions of RF energy. However, use of the computer functions of your device must be
restricted in certain situations.
Pacemakers
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six (6”) inches be
maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the
pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research.
Never come closer than six (6) inches to a person with a heart pacemaker implant when using your device.
Doing so could result in interference with the function of the pacemaker.
Persons with pacemakers:
ⅷ Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches from their pacemaker when the phone is
turned ON.
ⅷ Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
ⅷ Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
This is not necessary if the device is not held to the ear.
Note
ⅷ If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn the phone OFF immediately.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you
may want to consult your service provider, or call the customer service line to discuss alternatives.
For more regulatory information about hearing devices, see “FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this
information.
Hospitals and Health Care Facilities
Turn your device OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do
so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Electronic Devices in Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles.
Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the
manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.
208
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
Posted Facilities
Turn your device OFF where posted notices so require.
Turn Off Your Device Before Flying
Aircraft
FCC regulations prohibit using the transmitting and phone functions of your device while in the air. In
addition, most airline regulations prohibit the on-board use of portable PCs (and all other portable electronic
devices that could potentially emit stray RF energy), particularly during take-offs and landings, to prevent any
possible interference with the reception of signals by airborne electronic navigational devices.
Turn your device OFF before boarding an aircraft. Always request and obtain prior consent and approval of
an authorized airline representative before using your device aboard an aircraft. Always follow the
instructions of the airline representative whenever using your device aboard an aircraft, to prevent any
possible interference with airborne electronic equipment.
Turn Off Your Device in Dangerous Areas
Blasting Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your device OFF when in a “blasting area” or in areas
posted “Turn off two-way radio”. Obey all signs and instructions.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
Turn your device OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include fueling
areas such as gas stations; below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles
using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or
articles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to
turn off your vehicle’s engine.
General Safety
Your pocket PC is a high quality piece of equipment. Before operating, read all instructions and cautionary
markings on the product, battery and adapter/charger.
Failure to follow the directions below could result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage due to
battery liquid leakage, fire or rupture.
DO NOT use or store this equipment in a place where it will be exposed to high temperatures, such as near
an open flame or heat-emitting equipment.
DO NOT drop your device or subject it to severe shock. When not using, lay down the unit to avoid possible
damage due to instability.
DO NOT expose this equipment to rain or spilled beverages.
DO NOT use unauthorized accessories.
DO NOT disassemble the device or its accessories. If service or repair is required, return unit to an
authorized cellular service center. If the unit is disassembled, the risk of electric shock or fire may result.
Never allow metallic objects, such as staples and paper clips, to get into the inside of your device.
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
209
Never touch the liquid that might leak from a broken liquid crystal display. Contact with this liquid could
cause a skin rash. If the crystal display liquid should come into contact with the skin or clothing, wash it
immediately with clean water.
In the event that the device emits an unusual odor or sound or generates smoke, immediately disconnect
the AC adapter from the power outlet, and then detach the battery.
Antenna Safety
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or
attachments could impair call quality, damage your device, or result in violation of FCC regulations. Please
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.
Do not use the device with a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin, a
minor burn may result. Please contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.
Battery Safety
Your device uses a removable and rechargeable lithium ion battery. Please contact customer service for
assistance should you need a replacement battery.
DOs
ⅷ Only use the battery and charger approved by the manufacturer.
ⅷ Only use the battery for its original purpose.
ⅷ Try to keep batteries in a temperature between 41°F (5°C) and 95°F (35°C).
ⅷ If the battery is stored in temperatures above or below the recommended range, give it time to warm up or
cool down before using.
ⅷ Completely drain the battery before recharging. It may take one to four days to completely drain.
ⅷ Store the discharged battery in a cool, dark, and dry place.
ⅷ Purchase a new battery when its operating time gradually decreases after fully charging.
ⅷ Properly dispose of the battery according to local regulations.
DON’Ts
ⅷ Don’t attempt to disassemble the battery – it is a sealed unit with no serviceable parts.
ⅷ Don’t expose the battery terminals to any other metal object (e.g., by carrying it in your pocket or purse
with other metallic objects such as coins, clips and pens). This can short circuit and critically damage the
battery.
ⅷ Don’t leave the battery in hot or cold temps. Otherwise, it could significantly reduce the capacity and
lifetime of the battery.
ⅷ Don’t dispose of the battery into a fire.
Lithium ion batteries are recyclable. When you replace the removable battery, please request the repair
center to recycle the battery in accordance with RBRC standards. When disposing of the battery by yourself,
please call RBRC at (800) 822-8837 for proper disposal tips.
Never touch any fluid that might leak from the built-in battery. Such liquid when in contact with the eyes or
skin, could cause injury to the skin or eyes. Should the liquid come into contact with the eyes, irrigate the
eyes thoroughly with clean water and immediately seek medical attention. In the event the liquid comes into
contact with the skin or clothing, wash it away immediately with clean water.
210
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
Adapter/Charger
Use the Correct External Power Source
A product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If
you are not sure of the type of power source required, consult your authorized service provider or local
power company. For a product that operates from battery power or other sources, refer to the operating
instructions that are included with the product.
The AC Adapter/Charger designed for this unit requires the use of a standard 120 V AC power source for
device operation.
Never attempt to disassemble or repair an AC adapter/charger. Never use an AC adapter/charger if it has a
damaged or worn power cord or plug. Always contact an authorized service center, if repair or replacement
is required.
Never alter the AC cord or plug on an AC adapter/charger. If the plug will not fit into the available outlet, have
a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
Never allow any liquids or water to spill on an AC adapter/charger when it is connected to an AC power
source.
Always use the authorized AC adapter/charger to avoid any risk of bodily injury or damage to your cellular
phone or battery.
Never attempt to connect or disconnect the AC adapter/charger with wet hands. Always unplug the AC
adapter/charger from the power source before attempting any cleaning. Always use a soft cloth dampened
with water to clean the equipment, after it has been unplugged.
Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product, will expose
you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Always disconnect the travel charger or desktop charger from the power source when it is not in use.
Section 4A. Important Safety Information
211
Section 4B
Regulatory Notices
This section provides more safety information and regulation statement for using your device.
Regulatory Agency Identifications
For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a model number of RHOD400.
To ensure continued reliable and safe operation of your device, use only the accessories listed below with
your RHOD400.
The Battery Pack has been assigned a model number of RHOD160.
Operating temperature range: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
This product is intended for use with a certified Class 2 Limited Power Source, rated 5 Volts DC, maximum 1 Amp
power supply unit.
Note
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one of the following measures:
ⅷ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
ⅷ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
ⅷ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
ⅷ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
212
Section 4B. Regulatory Notices
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Important
Note
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End
users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. To maintain
compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please follow operation instruction as
documented in this manual.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except the transmitters built-in with the device.
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-
309 modified the exception of wireless phones under the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to
require digital wireless phones be compatible with hearing-aids. The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure
reasonable access to telecommunications services for persons with hearing disabilities. While some
wireless phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may
detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this
interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of interference they generate. The wireless telephone
industry has developed a rating system for wireless phones, to assist hearing device users find phones that
may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that are rated have
the rating on their box or a label located on the box. The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary
depending on the user’s hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable
to interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone successfully. Trying out the phone with your
hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs.
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than phones that are not rated. M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings.
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to be more usable with a hearing
aid’s telecoil than phones that are not rated. T4 is the better/higher of the two ratings.
RHOD400 complies with the FCC’s requirements for hearing aid compatibility when using the CDMA air
interface. The M rating in this mode is M4 and the T rating in this mode is T3.
Your hearing device manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher ratings
mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and wireless phone
rating values are then added together. A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6 is
considered for better use. A sum of 8 is considered for best use.
In the above example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless phone meets the M3 level
rating, the sum of the two values equal M5. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal usage”
while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless phone. “Normal usage” in this context is defined as
a signal quality that is acceptable for normal operation.
Section 4B. Regulatory Notices
213
This methodology applies equally for T ratings. The M mark is intended to be synonymous with the U mark.
The T mark is intended to be synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are recommended by the
Alliance for Telecommunications Industries Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section
20.19 of the FCC Rules. The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
For information about hearing aids and digital wireless phones
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility and Volume Control:
Gallaudet University, RERC:
This handset complies with the FCC’s requirements for Hearing Aid Compatibility when using the CDMA air
interface at both the PCS (1900 MHz) and Cellular (800 MHz) frequency bands. Hearing Aid Compatibility
testing has resulted in an acoustic HAC rating of Mx and a T-Coil rating of Tx for CDMA operation. This
handset is not configured to use the GSM/UMTS air interface in the United States. Hearing aid or cochlear
implant users may have a slightly degraded experience when roaming internationally onto GSM or UMTS
networks. Hearing aid or cochlear implant users should consult the service provider about its return and
exchange policies and for information on hearing aid compatibility.
SAR Information
1.410 W/kg @ 1g ( FCC )
THIS MODEL DEVICE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT’S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.
For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when
used with the HTC Corporation accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other
accessories may not ensure compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines.
Your wireless mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to
exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish
permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on the safety standards
previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:
ⅷ American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE. C95.1-1992.
ⅷ National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP). Report 86. 1986.
ⅷ International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1996.
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phone employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg*.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model device with all reported SAR levels
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model device is
on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of https://fjallfoss.fcc.gov/oetcf/eas/
reports/GenericSearch.cfm after searching on FCC ID: NM8RHOD400. Additional information on Specific
Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA)
* In the U.S., the SAR limit for mobile phone used by the public is 1.6 Watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one
gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the
public and to account for any variations in usage.
214
Section 4B. Regulatory Notices
Normal condition only to ensure the radiative performance and safety of the interference. As with other
mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and
for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close
to the antenna during operation of the equipment.
Body-worn Operation
This device was tested for typical body-worn operations. To comply with RF exposure requirements, a
minimum separation distance of 1.5 cm must be maintained between the user’s body and the handset,
including the antenna. Third-party belt-clips, holsters, and similar accessories used by this device should not
contain any metallic components. Body-worn accessories that do not meet these requirements may not
comply with RF exposure requirements and should be avoided.
Use only the supplied or an approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could
impair call quality, damage the phone, or result in violation of regulations. Do not use the phone with a
damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin, a minor burn may result. Please
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.
Telecommunications & Internet Association (TIA) Safety Information
Pacemakers
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six inches be
maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the
pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
ⅷ Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches from their pacemaker when the phone is
turned ON.
ⅷ Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
ⅷ Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you have any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn the phone OFF immediately.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you
may want to consult your service provider, or call the customer service line to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this
information.
Turn the phone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Section 4B. Regulatory Notices
215
WEEE Notice
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which entered into force as European
law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce disposal.
The WEEE logo (shown at the left) on the product or on its box indicates that this product must
not be disposed of or dumped with your other household waste. You are liable to dispose of
all your electronic or electrical waste equipment by relocating over to the specified collection
point for recycling of such hazardous waste. Isolated collection and proper recovery of your
electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow us to help
conserving natural resources. Moreover, proper recycling of the electronic and electrical waste
equipment will ensure safety of human health and environment. For more information about
electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery, and collection points, please
contact your local city center, household waste disposal service, shop from where you
purchased the equipment, or manufacturer of the equipment.
RoHS Compliance
This product is in compliance with Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of
27 January 2003, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment (RoHS) and its amendments.
216
Section 4B. Regulatory Notices
Section 4C
Warranty, Disclaimers and Other Notices
Your device has been designed to provide you with reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a problem
with your equipment, please refer to the manufacturer’s warranty in this section. For information regarding the
terms and conditions of service for your device, please visit www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer Service at
1-888-211-4727.
Manufacturer’s Warranty
12 Month Limited Warranty
HTC Corporation (the Company) warrants to the original retail purchaser of this HTC handheld portable
cellular telephone, that should this product or any part thereof during normal consumer usage and
conditions, be proven defective in material or workmanship that results in product failure within the first
twelve (12) month period from the date of purchase, such defect(s) will be repaired or replaced (with new or
rebuilt parts) at the Company’s option, without charge for parts or labor directly related to the defect(s).
The antenna, keypad, display, rechargeable battery and battery charger, if included, are similarly warranted
for twelve (12) months from date of purchase.
This Warranty extends only to consumers who purchase the product in the United States or Canada and it is
not transferable or assignable.
This Warranty does not apply to:
(a) Product subjected to abnormal use or conditions, accident, mishandling, neglect, unauthorized
alteration, misuse, improper installation or repair or improper storage;
(b) Product whose mechanical serial number or electronic serial number has been removed, altered or
defaced;
(c) Damage from exposure to moisture, humidity, excessive temperatures or extreme environmental
conditions;
(d) Damage resulting from connection to, or use of any accessory or other product not approved or
authorized by the Company;
(e) Defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items such as framing and non-operative
parts;
(f) Product damaged from external causes such as fire, flooding, dirt, sand, weather conditions, battery
leakage, blown fuse, theft or improper usage of any electrical source.
Section 4C. Warranty, Disclaimers and Other Notices
217
The Company disclaims liability for removal or reinstallation of the product, for geographic coverage, for
inadequate signal reception by the antenna or for communications range or operation of the cellular system
as a whole.
When sending your wireless device to HTC Corporation for repair or service, please note that any personal
data or software stored on the device may be inadvertently erased or altered. Therefore, we strongly
recommend you make a back up copy of all data and software contained on your device before submitting
it for repair or service. This includes all contact lists, downloads (i.e. third-party software applications,
ringtones, games and graphics) and any other data added to your device. In addition, if your wireless device
utilizes a SIM or Multimedia card, please remove the card before submitting the device and store for later use
when your device is returned, HTC Corporation is not responsible for and does not guarantee restoration of
any third-party software, personal information or memory data contained in, stored on, or integrated with any
wireless device, whether under warranty or not, returned to HTC Corporation for repair or service.
To obtain repairs or replacement within the terms of this Warranty, the product should be delivered with proof
of Warranty coverage (e.g. dated bill of sale), the consumer’s return address, daytime phone number and/or
fax number and complete description of the problem, transportation prepaid, to the Company at the address
shown below or to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. In addition, for reference to
an authorized Warranty station in your area, you may telephone in the United States (888) 870-4736.
THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S LAIBILITY EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY.
ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN A PERIOD OF 18 MONTHS
FROM DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR AN SPECIAL
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHATSOEVER. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE DELAY IN
RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE TIME THE PRODUCT IS
BEING REPAIRED OR REPLACED.
No person or representative is authorized to assume for the Company any liability other than expressed
herein in connection with the sale of this product.
Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damage so the above limitation or exclusions may not apply to you.
This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to
state.
IN USA AND CANADA:
HTC Corporation
5950 Corporate Dr.
Houston, TX 77036
218
Section 4C. Warranty, Disclaimers and Other Notices
Privacy Restrictions
Some countries require full disclosure of recorded telephone conversations, and stipulate that you must
inform the person with whom you are speaking that the conversation is being recorded. Always obey the
relevant laws and regulations of your country when using the recording feature of your device.
Weather Disclaimer
THE WEATHER INFORMATION, DATA AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT
WARRANTY OR TECHNICAL SUPPORT OF ANY KIND FROM HTC. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, HTC AND ITS AFFILIATES expressly disclaim any and all representations and
warranties, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, regarding the Weather Information, Data,
Documentation, or any other Products and services, including without limitation any express or implied
warranty of merchantability, express or implied warranty of fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement,
quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, usefulness, that the Weather Information, Data and/
or Documentation will be error-free, or implied warranties arising from course of dealing or course of
performance.
Without limiting the foregoing, it is further understood that HTC and its Providers are not responsible for Your
use or misuse of the Weather Information, Data and/or Documentation or the results from such use. HTC
and its Providers make no express or implied warranties, guarantees or affirmations that weather information
will occur or has occurred as the reports, forecasts, data, or information state, represent or depict and it shall
have no responsibility or liability whatsoever to any person or entity, parties and non-parties alike, for any
inconsistency, inaccuracy, or omission for weather or events predicted or depicted, reported, occurring or
occurred. WITHOUT LIMITING THE GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE
WEATHER INFORMATION, DATA AND/OR DOCUMENTATION MAY INCLUDE INACCURACIES AND YOU
WILL USE COMMON SENSE AND FOLLOW STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN CONNECTION WITH
THE USE OF THE WEATHER INFORMATION, DATA OR DOCUMENTATION.
Warranty Disclaimer
Your warranty is invalidated if you open or tamper with the device's outer casing.
Limitation of Damages
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HTC OR ITS
PROVIDERS BE LIABLE TO USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, IN CONTRACT OR TORT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, INJURY, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY, LOSS
OF DATA, AND/OR LOSS OF PROFITS ARISING OUT OF, OR RELATED TO, IN ANY MANNER, OR THE
DELIVERY, PERFORMANCE OR NONPERFORMANCE OF OBLIGATIONS, OR USE OF THE WEATHER
INFORMATION, DATA OR DOCUMENTATION HEREUNDER REGARDLESS OF THE FORESEEABILITY
THEREOF.
Section 4C. Warranty, Disclaimers and Other Notices
219
Section 4D
Copyright, Trademark, and Properietary Notices
© 2009 Sprint. Sprint and the logo are trademarks of Sprint. Other marks are the property of their
respective owners.
HTC, the HTC logo, HTC Innovation, ExtUSB, TouchFLO, HTC Touch Pro, and HTC Care are trademarks and/
or service marks of HTC Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Mobile, Windows XP, Windows Vista, ActiveSync, Windows Mobile Device
Center, Internet Explorer, MSN, Hotmail, Windows Live, Outlook, Excel, PowerPoint, Word, OneNote and
Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Java, J2ME and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.
Opera Mobile from Opera Software ASA. Copyright 1995-2009 Opera Software ASA. All Rights Reserved.
Google, Google Maps, and YouTube are trademarks of Google, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following patents:
4,901,307
5,506,865
5,267,261
5,600,754
5,490,165
5,109,390
5,544,196
5,414,796
5,056,109
5,511,073
5,267,262
5,657,420
5,504,773
5,228,054
5,568,483
5,416,797
5,101,501
5,535,239
5,337,338
5,778,338
5,710,784
5,659,569
All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks, registered trademarks or
service marks of their respective owners.
220
Section 4D. Copyright, Trademark, and Properietary Notices
C
Index
Calendar
A
A2DP 94
Call Barring (GSM) 197
Call Forwarding (CDMA) 136
Call Guard (CDMA) 138
About 116, 118
ActiveSync 71, 72
Adding and Removing Programs 122
Adobe Reader LE 82
Advanced Network (GSM mode) 117
Alarm Clock 37
Call Waiting
Caller ID
Album
Camera
Viewing a Photo 106
Onscreen Controls and Indicators 102
Attachment
Certificates 116
Audio Booster 112
Checking Missed Calls 63
Clear Storage 116, 124
Auto Volume Control 116
Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) 115
Clock & Alarms 116
Comm Manager 81, 117
Company Directory 166
Connecting to an External Display 121
Connecting to Data Services 143
Connections Settings 117
B
Backlight
Basic Settings 118
Battery
Contacts Picture capture mode 99
Copying and Managing Files 114
Customer Feedback 116
Charging the Battery 13
Installing the Battery 2
Removing the Battery 13
D
Bluetooth
Data Roam Guard (CDMA) 139
Device Information 116
Device Name 118
Connecting a Bluetooth Hands-free or Srereo
Printing 97
Turning Bluetooth On and Making Your Device
Direct Dial
Direct Push 82, 163
Domain Enroll 117
Downloading
Business Card Scanner (see “WorldCard Mobile”)
Buttons 115
Index
221
International Calls
E
Email
Internet Email 158
Sending 159
Internet Explorer Mobile 147
Internet Sharing 167
Internet Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 47
J
Emoticon
JETCET Presentation 84
JETCET PRINT 89
Encryption 91, 116
Error Reporting 116
K
L
External GPS 116
Keyboard Sliding Sound 115
F
Library
Facebook Updates and Events 42
Favorite Contacts 37
File Explorer 114
Live Messenger 150
Live Search 186
Lock 115
Finding Contacts
Company Directory 166
Full QWERTY 27
Global Mode 190
M
G
Mail Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 44
Making a Call
Global Smart Dialing
G-Sensor 116
GSM 190, 197
Managed Programs 116
Meeting Requests 165
H
I
Menus 115
Hard Reset 124
Messaging
Hearing Aid Compliance 115
Instant Messaging 157
Home Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 35
Messenger 150
Microsoft Office Mobile 83
Missed Call Notification 63
MMS Video Capture Mode 99
Modem 167
Input 115
Input Methods
Full QWERTY 27
Inserting the microSD Card 90
Instant Messaging 157
MP3 Trimmer 113
222
Index
Resetting
N
Network Selection (GSM) 200
News Channels (Web Feeds) 154
Notes 78
Ring Type 119
Roaming 137
Numeric and Symbol Mode 31
O
Office Mobile 83
S
Opera Mobile 145
Owner Information 115
Screen 116, 118
Screen Text Size 118
Security 115
P
Selecting a Network (GSM) 200
Panorama Capture Mode 99
People Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 37
Sending
Text Message 132
Video and Picture Messages 134
Phone Keypad 29
Phone Services 68
Photo Capture Mode 99
Photos and Videos Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 49
Picture Theme Capture Mode 99
Sending and Receiving Information Using
Bluetooth 95
Settings Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 56
SIM Card 188
Playing Music
SIM Phonebook 194
Sleep Mode 12
Playlists
Plus (+) Code Dialing (GSM) 191
Power 116
Soft Reset 123
Speakerphone 62
Predictive Mode 30
Putting a Call On Hold 61
Speed Dial 64
Sprint Instant Messaging 157
Sprint Music Store 171
Sprint TV 169
Q
Quick Menu 21, 119
QuickGPS 183
Sprint TV Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 53
Start Screen 18
R
Status Icons 19
Recording
Streaming Media 173
Switching Between Two Calls 61
Voice Recorder 87
Synchronizing
Remote Desktop Mobile 168
Remove Programs 116
Choosing What Information Is Synchronized 72
Exchange Server 162
Your Device With Your Computer 72
Removing the microSD card 90
Replying
Text (SMS) 133
Index
223
Wireless printing (see “JETCET Print”) 89
World Clock 35
T
Tasks 79
WorldCard Mobile 88
Text Messages
Y
Z
Creating a New Text Message 131
Sending 132
YouTube 174
Text Size (Screen) 118
Three-Way Call (CDMA) 137
Today 115
Zooming
Touch Focus 100
TouchFLO 3D 32
TouchFLO Settings 116
Troubleshooting
Turning Your Device On and Off 12
TV Out 117
U
Update Firmware 117
Update PRL 117
Update Profile 117
Updates and Events (Facebook) 42
Using Your Device As a Modem 167
Using Your Device as a USB Drive 91
V
Vibrate 20
Video Capture Mode 99
Voice Command 115
Voice Recorder 87
W
Weather Tab (TouchFLO 3D) 54
Windows Live 149
Windows Live Messenger 150
Windows Live Search 186
Windows Media Player Mobile 109
Windows Mobile Device Center 70
224
Index
|
